Canon MB5300 series Скачать руководство пользователя страница 753 | Manualshive

Страница: 753 / 1168

background image

When scanning is completed, the scanned image appears in the application.

Scanning with WIA Driver 1.0

The following is an example of scanning using "Paint."

1. Place the item on the platen or ADF.

Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)

2. Click

From scanner or camera

from the

File

menu of Paint. (Select the command to

scan an item in the application.)

Note

• If you have more than one scanner or printer, a scanner selection screen may appear. Double-

click the scanner you want to use.

• For USB connection:

Canon XXX series

(where "XXX" is the model name)

• For network connection:

XXX series_MAC address

(where "XXX" is the model name)

3. Select the paper source and type of picture according to the item to be scanned.

To scan from the platen, select

Flatbed

for

Paper source

. To scan from the ADF, select

Document

Feeder

.

Select the type of picture from

Color picture

,

Grayscale picture

,

Black and white picture or text

,

and

Custom Settings

.

Note

• When using the scanner or printer with network connection, the options for the type of picture

may differ from those displayed with USB connection.

• To scan with the values previously set in

Adjust the quality of the scanned picture

, select

Custom Settings

.

• Selecting

Document Feeder

for

Paper source

enables you to select

Page size

.

4. Click

Adjust the quality of the scanned picture

and set the preferences as required.

Brightness

Move the slider to adjust the brightness. Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the
image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).

Contrast

Move the slider to adjust the contrast. Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image,
thus softening the image. Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image, thus
sharpening the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).

Resolution (DPI)

Enter the resolution. Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi.

Resolution

753

Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals

«
...
751
752
753
754
755
...
»

Содержание MB5300 series

Страница 1: ...300 series Online Manual Read Me First Useful Functions Available on the Machine Overview of the Machine Printing Copying Scanning Faxing Troubleshooting English Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 2: ...ice for Web Service Printing 41 Use MAXIFY Cloud Link 43 Using MAXIFY Cloud Link from Your Printer 44 Before Using MAXIFY Cloud Link from Your Printer 45 Preparing to Use MAXIFY Cloud Link from Your Printer 46 Application Management 49 Using MAXIFY Cloud Link 54 Cloud Windows 57 Cloud Troubleshooting 60 Using MAXIFY Cloud Link from Your Smartphone Tablet or Computer 61 Before Using Canon Inkjet Cl...

Страница 3: ...ions 128 Printing with Windows RT 129 Overview of the Machine 130 Safety Guide 131 Safety Precautions 132 Regulatory and Safety Information 133 Main Components and Basic Operations 140 Main Components 141 Front View 142 Rear View 144 Inside View 145 Operation Panel 146 About the Power Supply of the Machine 147 Confirming that the Power Is On 148 Turning the Machine On and Off 149 Notice for the Po...

Страница 4: ...ing the Ink Status from Your Computer 200 Checking the Ink Status 201 Checking the Ink Status with the Touch Screen on the Machine 202 Maintenance 203 When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect 204 Maintenance Procedure 205 Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern 207 Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern 209 Cleaning the Print Head 211 Cleaning the Print Head Deeply 213 Aligning the Print Head 215...

Страница 5: ...rint settings 258 LAN settings 259 Device user settings 264 Language selection 266 Firmware update 267 Cassette settings 268 Administrator password setting 269 Operation restrictions 270 Reset setting 271 About ECO settings 273 About Quiet setting 276 Using the Machine with the Access Point Mode 278 Registering the Favorite Settings Custom profiles 282 Checking the Total Number of Uses of the Mach...

Страница 6: ... Type Confirmation Screen 323 PSK Passphrase and Dynamic Encryption Setup Screen 324 Setup Information Confirmation Screen 325 Wired LAN Sheet 326 Admin Password Sheet 327 Network Information Screen 328 Access Control Sheet 329 Edit Accessible MAC Address Screen Add Accessible MAC Address Screen 333 Edit Accessible IP Address Screen Add Accessible IP Address Screen 334 Other Screens of IJ Network ...

Страница 7: ...g the Operation 380 Sharing the Printer on a Network 382 Setting Up a Shared Printer 383 Restrictions on Printer Sharing 385 About the Administrator Password 387 Printing 388 Printing from a Computer 389 Printing with Application Software that You are Using Printer Driver 390 Printing with Easy Setup 391 Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer Media Type 394 Paper Settings on the Prin...

Страница 8: ...olor Balance 450 Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns Printer Driver 452 Adjusting Brightness 456 Adjusting Intensity 458 Adjusting Contrast 460 Adjusting Intensity Contrast Using Sample Patterns Printer Driver 462 Overview of the Printer Driver 466 Canon IJ Printer Driver 467 How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window 468 Canon IJ Status Monitor 469 Checking the Ink Status from Your Com...

Страница 9: ... Reducing or Enlarging a Copy 552 Two Sided Copying 554 About Special Copy Menu 558 Copying Thick Originals Such as Books 559 Copying Two Pages to Fit onto a Single Page 560 Copying Four Pages to Fit onto a Single Page 562 Collated Copying 565 Scanning 567 Scanning from a Computer 568 Scanning with IJ Scan Utility 569 What Is IJ Scan Utility Scanner Software 570 Starting IJ Scan Utility 572 Scanni...

Страница 10: ... Time with ScanGear Scanner Driver 670 Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear Scanner Driver 674 Correcting Images Unsharp Mask Reduce Dust and Scratches Fading Correction etc 675 Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern 679 Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance 681 Adjusting Brightness and Contrast 683 Adjusting Histogram 685 Adjusting Tone Curve 689 Setting Threshold 692 ScanGear Sc...

Страница 11: ...mputer Using the Operation Panel of the Machine 771 Deleting Scanned Data on USB Flash Drive 774 Setting Items for Scanning Using the Operation Panel of the Machine 776 Network Scan Settings 779 Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using IJ Scan Utility 783 Faxing 786 Preparing for Faxing 787 Connecting the Telephone Line 788 Setting the Telephone Line Type 791 Setting the Rec...

Страница 12: ...eed Dial Utility 850 Calling the Registered Information Up from Your Computer and Registering the Information to the Machine 851 Uninstalling Speed Dial Utility 852 Receiving Faxes 853 Receiving Faxes 854 Changing the Paper Settings 859 Memory Reception 861 Receiving Faxes Using Useful Functions 863 Saving Received Faxes Automatically on a USB Flash Drive 864 Forwarding Received Faxes Automaticall...

Страница 13: ...eless LAN Setup Check 1 927 Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup Check 2 928 Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup Check 3 929 Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup Check 4 930 Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup Check 5 931 Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup Check 6 932 Cannot Detect the Machine during Wired LAN Setup Che...

Страница 14: ...Curls or Has Ink Blots 972 Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched 973 Back of the Paper Is Smudged 977 Colors Are Uneven or Streaked 978 Ink Is Not Ejected 980 Problems with Scanning 981 Problems with Scanning 982 Scanner Does Not Work 983 ScanGear Scanner Driver Does Not Start 984 Error Message Appears and the ScanGear Scanner Driver Screen Does Not Appear 985 Cannot Scan Multiple Items at...

Страница 15: ...ne with USB Connection 1017 The Display on the Touch Screen Cannot Be Seen At All 1018 An Unintended Language Is Displayed on the Touch Screen 1019 Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing 1020 Printer Status Monitor Is Not Displayed 1021 Problems with Installation Downloading 1022 Cannot Install the MP Drivers 1023 Easy WebPrint EX Does Not Start Up or Easy WebPrint EX Menu D...

Страница 16: ...1688 1068 1700 1069 1701 1070 1754 1071 1755 1072 1872 1073 1873 1074 1874 1075 1890 1076 2001 1077 2002 1078 2111 1079 2112 1082 2113 1085 2121 1088 2122 1089 2500 1090 2700 1091 2802 1092 2803 1093 2805 1095 4100 1096 4103 1097 4104 1098 5011 1099 5012 1100 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 17: ...5203 1110 5204 1111 5205 1112 5206 1113 5207 1114 5208 1115 5209 1116 5400 1117 5500 1118 5501 1119 5B00 1120 5B01 1121 5C01 1122 6000 1123 6500 1124 6502 1125 6700 1126 6800 1127 6801 1128 6900 1129 6901 1130 6902 1131 6910 1132 6911 1133 6920 1134 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 18: ...693A 1144 6940 1145 6941 1146 6942 1147 6943 1148 6944 1149 6945 1150 6946 1151 7100 1152 7200 1153 7201 1154 7202 1155 7203 1156 7204 1157 7205 1158 7300 1159 9000 1160 9500 1161 B202 1162 B203 1163 B204 1164 B502 1165 B503 1166 B504 1167 C000 1168 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 19: ...ose the manuals of all the products sold by Canon See the manual supplied with the product when using a product that is not described in this guide How to Print Use the print function of your Web browser to print this guide To set to print background colors and images follow the steps below Note In Windows 8 print in the desktop version In Internet Explorer 9 10 or 11 1 Select Tools Print Page set...

Страница 20: ... Instructions including important information To avoid damage and injury or improper use of the product be sure to read these indications Note Instructions including notes for operation and additional explanations Basic Instructions explaining basic operations of your product Note Icons may vary depending on your product Touch enabled Device Users For touch actions you need to replace right click ...

Страница 21: ... and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation ...

Страница 22: ... interfaces of the Work and Derivative Works thereof Contribution shall mean any work of authorship including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owne...

Страница 23: ...onstrued as modifying the License You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use reproduction or distribution of Your modifications or for any such Derivative Works as a whole provided Your use reproduction and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License 5 Submiss...

Страница 24: ...of support warranty indemnity or other liability obligations and or rights consistent with this License However in accepting such obligations You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility not on behalf of any other Contributor and only if You agree to indemnify defend and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by or claims asserted against such Contributor ...

Страница 25: ...If you want to narrow down the search results add your product s model name or your application s name to the keywords Searching for Functions Enter your product s model name and a keyword for the function you want to learn about Example When you want to learn how to load paper Enter your product s model name load paper in the search window and perform a search Troubleshooting Errors Enter your pr...

Страница 26: ...erform a search Searching for Reference Pages Enter your model name and a reference page title You can find reference pages more easily by entering the function name as well Example When you want to browse the page referred to by the following sentence on a scanning procedure page Refer to Color Settings Tab for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details Enter your product s model name ...

Страница 27: ... guide most of the operations are described based on the windows displayed when Windows 8 1 operating system called Windows 8 1 below or Windows 8 operating system called Windows 8 below is used 27 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 28: ...the Machine More Conveniently with Quick Toolbox Connection Methods Available on the Machine Notice for Web Service Printing Use MAXIFY Cloud Link Printing with Google Cloud Print Printing from AirPrint Compliant Device Checking Printer Information Online Storage Integration Function How to Use Print from E mail Print Easily from a Smartphone or Tablet with MAXIFY Printing Solutions Printing with ...

Страница 29: ... environment without an access point or wireless LAN router Switch to access point mode with simple steps to enjoy scanning and printing wirelessly When you use the machine with the access point mode be sure to specify the access point name of the machine and the security setting in advance Using the Machine with the Access Point Mode 29 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 30: ...ers using models that support PREMIUM Contents can download exclusive printing materials PREMIUM Contents can be downloaded easily via Easy PhotoPrint Downloaded PREMIUM Contents can be printed directly with Easy PhotoPrint To download PREMIUM Contents make sure that genuine Canon ink tanks ink cartridges are installed for all colors on a supported printer Note The designs of PREMIUM Contents prov...

Страница 31: ... the web from a computer or tablet By using Easy PhotoPrint you can create items in the latest environment without going through the trouble of installation Moreover you can use various photos for your item through integration with social networks such as Facebook or with online storage web albums etc Refer to Easy PhotoPrint Guide for details 31 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 32: ...Your Days to collect Facebook photos of memories of parties and travel recent activity of your family and friends your hobbies etc then create and print a work of art Print Your Days is available from the Print Your Days Facebook page 32 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 33: ... use with one click After installing utilities compatible with Quick Toolbox they will be added to this menu The Quick Toolbox provides a convenient way to quickly launch added utilities for making machine settings and doing other management tasks Refer to Quick Toolbox Guide for details 33 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 34: ...me If you have an access point or wireless network router it is recommended that you use the method described in Connection Using an Access Point When connecting another device while a device is already connected to the printer connect it using the same connection method as the connected device If you connect using a different connection method the connection to the device in use will be disabled ...

Страница 35: ... In that case the connection of the device may switch to a mobile data connection automatically depending on your device Transmission fees for connecting to the Internet using a mobile data connection apply In access point mode you can connect up to five devices at the same time If you try to connect a sixth device while five devices are already connected an error will appear If an error appears d...

Страница 36: ...on A on the printer 2 Tap the bottom left B of the screen 3 Tap Access point mode active 4 Check the SSID displayed in the printer screen 5 Tap Details check the Password network key then tap OK You will use the SSID and Password network key in the subsequent steps 36 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 37: ...n the notification area of the taskbar on the computer then select View Available Wireless Networks 8 Select the network name SSID you want to use then click Connect 9 Enter the Password Network key then click Connect 37 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 38: ...10 When connection is complete click Back until the screen below appears Proceed with the setup 38 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 39: ...e setting Do not operate the screen of this guide until the setup is complete For office use consult your network administrator Take added care when connecting to a network that is not protected with security measures as there is a risk of disclosing data such as your personal information to a third party Connection without Using an Access Point Important If you connect a device connected to the I...

Страница 40: ...d to the printer in access point mode cannot communicate with each other Firmware updates for the printer are not available while using the access point mode When a device has been connected to the printer without using an access point and you want to set it up again using the same connection method disconnect it first Disable the connection between the device and printer in the Wi Fi setting scre...

Страница 41: ...e or dispose of it delete your login name and password from the machine s memory in advance The account information will be sent to Canon Inc server located in Japan then forwarded to the service provider s server Canon handles your account information as follows Your account information will be used in personal identification process of the selected service Canon will not provide your account inf...

Страница 42: ...le or characters displayed on the web template printing service Except as otherwise permitted please see 2 below copying modifying or distributing all or a portion of any of the materials contained on the web template printing service without prior consent of the respective rights Rights of Publicity and Copyright holder is strictly prohibited 2 All of the materials provided on the web template pr...

Страница 43: ...addition you can use various functions by adding and registering apps that are linked with various cloud services Using MAXIFY Cloud Link from Your Printer Using MAXIFY Cloud Link from Your Smartphone Tablet or Computer Important In certain countries MAXIFY Cloud Link may not be available or the available apps may be different Some apps require that you have an account before you use those apps Fo...

Страница 44: ...d Link from Your Printer Before Using MAXIFY Cloud Link from Your Printer Preparing to Use MAXIFY Cloud Link from Your Printer Using MAXIFY Cloud Link Cloud Troubleshooting 44 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 45: ...ions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the University of Cambridge nor the name of...

Страница 46: ...t Next Note If multiple users will be using the printer after the initial registration select the login user name from the user selection screen enter the Security code and proceed with the registration If the Security code is incorrect use your smartphone tablet or computer and change the setting from the User information of the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center 5 In the License agreement and Pr...

Страница 47: ...ce by selecting Agree from the registration screen later You can print the displayed information by pressing the Start button 6 On the Time zone screen select the time closest to your region and then select Next 7 In the time zones list select the region closest to you For some regions a screen for applying the daylight saving time setting may appear 8 When a message appears notifying that the app...

Страница 48: ...yed See here for the description of the apps list screen After you complete the registration you can print photos and documents that have been uploaded to apps on the linked cloud service and add delete sort apps Using MAXIFY Cloud Link 48 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 49: ... your favorite apps to the printer Follow the steps described below to add apps 1 From the printer home screen select Cloud 2 On the cloud s Main screen select Add delete 3 Select Register apps 4 From the list select the category of the app 5 From the displayed apps list select the app that you want to register 49 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 50: ...stration select Back and return to the cloud s Main screen Important Some apps may require a linked app account before you can use the app If this is the case set up an account beforehand Delete apps You can delete unnecessary apps from the apps list Follow the steps described below to delete apps 1 From the printer home screen select Cloud 2 On the cloud s Main screen select Add delete 50 Downloa...

Страница 51: ...ith genuine Canon ink 5 Select Delete When the deletion is finished the app will be deleted from the apps list on the main screen To delete another app repeat the procedure from step 4 To end the app deletion select Back and return to the cloud s Main screen Sort apps You can sort apps displayed on the apps list Follow the steps described below to sort apps 1 From the printer home screen select Cl...

Страница 52: ...app that you want to sort Note Description of displayed icons Cannot be used because it is not yet released not available in your region or does not support your model Can be used with genuine Canon ink 5 Use buttons to move the app 6 Select Done 52 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 53: ...Sorting is complete To continue the sorting repeat the procedure from step 4 To end the sorting select Back and return to the cloud s Main screen 53 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 54: ...er is on and is connected to the network Then start Note You can use CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to print jpg and jpeg file formats 1 On the Main screen select the app to be used 2 Enter the information according to the instructions on the authentication screen and then select Log in Important Some apps may not be fully displayed in the display area If this is the case scroll up down right and left to cha...

Страница 55: ...ct Continue and perform the operation from Step 3 To end the printing select Apps The screen returns to the apps list screen Important If a print job is not printed within 24 hours after the print job is issued the print job will expire and cannot be printed With premium apps that limit the number of print jobs print jobs that cannot be printed due to expiration and other reasons are also included...

Страница 56: ...ice from the Home window on the operation panel select Setup Web service setup Web service connection setup IJ Cloud Printing Center setup History setting for this service Save Cloud Troubleshooting 56 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 57: ...ments and adding starting and managing apps 1 Display area 2 Add delete button 3 Manage button Important Some apps may require you to have an account before using the app If this is the case get the account beforehand After selecting the app some apps may not be fully displayed in the display area If this is the case scroll up down right and left to change the display area Visible area The app is ...

Страница 58: ...er apps Select this to add your favorite apps See here for details on how to add apps Delete apps Select this to delete registered apps See here for details on how to delete apps Sort Select this to sort the apps list See here for details on how to sort the apps list 3 Manage button Use this button to manage jobs log out of an app show the license agreement and privacy statement and set the time z...

Страница 59: ...region Legal information This shows the License agreement and Privacy statement Press the Start button to print the displayed information Log out of all apps You can log out at the same time from all apps that you are logged into Note Some apps may not allow you to log out when you are logged on If you want to log in with a different account you need to use this function to log out first Once you ...

Страница 60: ...you still cannot print see the troubleshooting page for your model on the Home of the Online Manual Note With a wireless LAN connection after the printer is turned on it may take several minutes before communication is possible Check that your printer is connected to the wireless network and wait a while before you start printing If the printer is not turned on or is not connected to the Internet ...

Страница 61: ...non Inkjet Cloud Printing Center Preparations Before Using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center Using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center Adding a Printer Adding a MAXIFY Cloud Link User Troubleshooting Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center 61 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 62: ...int documents be sure to check these precautions beforehand Printer specification Check that Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center supports the printer Network environment The printer must be connected to a LAN and to the Internet Important The user will bear the cost of Internet access Operating requirements For computers smartphones and tablet devices see Requirements for Canon Inkjet Cloud Printin...

Страница 63: ... X Mavericks v10 9 Safari 5 1 6 7 When you use Internet Explorer 8 the web pages may not display correctly Canon recommends that you upgrade to Internet Explorer 9 or later or use another browser Smartphone or tablet OS Browser Resolution iOS 5 1 or later OS standard browser 320 x 480 HVGA or higher Android 2 3 3 or later 480 x 800 HVGA or higher Android3 x is not supported Important On the browse...

Страница 64: ... In an in house network environment the 5222 port must be released For confirmation instructions contact the network administrator 64 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 65: ...etup Web service connection setup IJ Cloud Printing Center setup Register with this service 2 In the registration confirmation window Select Yes 3 In the print settings select the display language 4 Follow the instructions displayed in the window and print the URL of the authentication site and the Printer registration ID Set A4 size or Letter size plain paper and select OK The authentication URL ...

Страница 66: ... the printed page and then enter the e mail address and other necessary information Important Do not use the Back button of the web browser while an operation is processing The screen may not transition properly 1 Use the web browser on your PC smartphone tablet or other devices to access the authentication URL 66 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 67: ...ct Create new account 3 Enter the E mail address and Printer registration ID of the printer s owner and then select OK The registration page URL is sent to the e mail address entered 67 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 68: ...ce You may not be able to receive the notification if you are using a spam filter If you have a setting to receive only the e mails from certain domains be sure to change the setting to allow receiving e mails from noreply mail cs c ij com There will be no error display even if you could not receive the e mail because of the spam filter setting or if you entered an incorrect e mail address Access ...

Страница 69: ...3 In the user information entry screen enter your Password and select Next Enter your password for logging in to the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center 69 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 70: ...between 8 and 32 characters long using single byte alphanumeric characters and symbols _ Alphabets are case sensitive 4 Enter the User name Enter the name that identifies the user Important The User name entry field has the following character restrictions 70 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 71: ...ou cannot find your region on the list select the one closest to your region Apply daylight saving time This appears only when there is a daylight saving time in the Time zone that you selected Select whether or not to apply the daylight saving time 6 Enter the Security code and select Done A Security code identifies the user when multiple other users are sharing the same printer 71 Downloaded fro...

Страница 72: ...s complete A registration completion message is displayed When you select the OK button in the message the login screen is displayed Enter the registered e mail address and password and log in to the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center Using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center 72 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 73: ...me window select Setup Web service setup Web service connection setup IJ Cloud Printing Center setup Register with this service 3 In the registration confirmation window Select Yes 4 In the print settings select the display language 5 Follow the instructions displayed in the window and print the URL of the authentication site and your Printer registration ID When you set A4 size or Letter size pla...

Страница 74: ...about the next hour You remain logged in for an hour after the last access Language Select the language you will be using E mail address Enter the e mail address that you entered in the user registration Important The e mail address is case sensitive Make sure the case is correct Password Enter the password that you entered in the user registration Keep login info When you select the check box the...

Страница 75: ... Cloud Printing Center is displayed About this service This displays the descriptions of this service Description of the Main screen When you log in to the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center the Main screen appears Important With this service the functions available to Standard user of the printer are different from those available to the printer Administrator Standard user can only use the functi...

Страница 76: ... 3 Right context menu 4 Display area 5 Menu area 1 Left context menu When you select the Mng printer screen of the Manage users screen appears For general users the Select printer screen appears Mng printer screen Select printer screen 76 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 77: ...icates that an error occurred on the printer Display update date time of the printer information This displays the date and time the printer information was last updated refreshes the information Multiuser mode If multiple users are using the printer select the Multiuser mode check box Copy apps Select this to copy apps added in the selected printer to another printer When you select the screen sh...

Страница 78: ... ownership of the printer select Clear the information saved on the printer Add printers Select this to add printers to be used in the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center You need a Printer registration ID to add a printer Note Up to 16 printers are guaranteed to operate for each e mail address Manage users screen From the Manage users screen you can check user information registered to the Canon I...

Страница 79: ...Standard users 2 Printer name area The registered name of the printer selected is displayed The Administrator can change the printer name 3 Right context menu When you select the context menu appears The information displayed depends on the menu currently selected in the menu area The symbol indicates that there is a new unread notice Sort This displays the screen to sort registered apps You can u...

Страница 80: ... registered e mail address password language time zone and other settings Help legal notices The description of the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center screen and various reminders are displayed Log out This opens the Log out screen of the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center 4 Display area The display changes based on the menu you select 80 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 81: ...s in the Display area Config This displays the Register apps screen in the Display area The display can be toggled between Registered and Search apps The Registered screen lists registered apps You can check the information of these apps or deregister them 81 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 82: ...re displayed by category When you select the details of the app are displayed When you select you can choose to register or unregister the app Note Description of displayed icons Cannot be used because it is not yet released not available in your region or does 82 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 83: ...m the actual status at the display time depending on the printer status Manage jobs This screen displays the print status and the print history You can check the print status by looking at Status list and the print history by looking at History You can also cancel print jobs and delete history information To cancel or delete a job select that job and then select Cancel or Delete If you are using a...

Страница 84: ...om the Mng printer screen Select printer screen you can check and update printer information registered to the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center change printer names delete printers add printers and copy apps Check the printer information The registered printer name is displayed indicates the currently selected printer indicates that an error occurred on the printer 84 Downloaded from ManualsPrin...

Страница 85: ...haracter limitation Up to 128 characters Delete printers When you select the printer is deleted from the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center When transferring the ownership of the printer select Clear the information saved on the printer Add printers Select this to add printers to be used in the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center You need a Printer registration ID to add a printer Note Up to 16 pri...

Страница 86: ...he user to be deleted and select Delete However you cannot delete yourself To delete yourself cancel your membership from the user information screen Adding a user Select Add user The user registration screen appears Changing Administrator and Standard user settings You can change the privileges of the Administrator and Standard users 3 Printer name area The registered name of the printer selected...

Страница 87: ...isplays the Register apps screen in the Display area The display can be toggled between Registered and Search apps The Registered screen lists registered apps You can check the information of these apps or deregister them On the Search apps screen the apps that you can register by using the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center are displayed by category 87 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 88: ...ch ink is remaining or details about an error that occurred You can also access the ink purchasing site and the Online Manual Important The Properties displayed may differ from the actual status at the display time depending on the printer status Manage jobs This screen displays the print status and the print history You can check the print status by looking at Status list and the print history by...

Страница 89: ...rmation area This display other information including the privacy statement and other companies licensing information 7 Global navigation area The User information Instructions and Log out buttons are displayed Press the User information to change the settings 8 Display area The display changes based on the menu you select 89 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 90: ...90 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 91: ...ou select the check box the login screen is skipped for 14 days since the last day that the service screen was accessed Important If you fail to log in five straight times you will not be able to login again for an hour You remain logged in for an hour after the last access The service may not function properly if you log in from multiple devices at the same time After logging in you can use usefu...

Страница 92: ...inted differ depending on the app Before you print check that printer is on and is connected to the network Then start This is available if you are using a smartphone or tablet Note You can use CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to print jpg and jpeg file formats 1 On the Main screen select the app to be used 2 Enter the information according to the instructions on the authentication screen and then select Log i...

Страница 93: ...4 In the displayed image list select the image that you want to print and then select Next 5 Make the necessary print settings and then select Print 93 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 94: ... screen returns to the apps list screen Important If a print job is not printed within 24 hours after the print job is issued the print job will expire and cannot be printed With premium apps that limit the number of print jobs print jobs that expire and cannot be printed are also included in the print count Adding a Printer 94 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 95: ...ter is as follows 1 Print the registration information from the printer to be added 2 From the browser on your smartphone tablet or computer access the authentication site URL 3 Select Add printer 4 When the confirmation message is displayed select OK 5 Enter your Printer registration ID and select OK 95 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 96: ...automatically 6 Enter the Password for the account you obtained beforehand and select OK Printer addition is completed If a printer added message is not displayed follow the instructions on the displayed screen Adding a MAXIFY Cloud Link User 96 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 97: ...a user 1 On the service screen select Manage users 2 Select Add user Note When you select Add user the service first checks whether the maximum number of users has been reached If new users can be added the user registration screen appears The maximum number of users that can be added for 1 printer is 20 97 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 98: ...n sent to the entered e mail address 4 Access the URL reported in the e mail 5 Read the terms displayed in the License agreement and Privacy statement screens If you agree to the terms select Agree 6 In the user information entry screen enter your Password and select Next 98 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 99: ... shown below The password needs to be between 8 and 32 characters long using single byte alphanumeric characters and symbols _ Alphabets are case sensitive 7 Enter the User Name Enter the name that identifies the user Important The User Name entry field has the following character restrictions 99 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 100: ...on the list If you cannot find your region on the list select the one closest to your region Apply daylight saving time This appears only when there is a daylight saving time in the time zone that you selected Select whether or not to apply the daylight saving time 9 Enter the Security code and select Done Enter the code for authenticating the user 100 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 101: ...o is registered first becomes the Administrator The administrator can change the privileges of users from the Manage users screen An Administrator can change printer information add and delete apps manage users and perform various other operations A Standard user can check printer information and start apps For information about the functions that each user can use refer to the Canon Inkjet Cloud ...

Страница 102: ...ress the Update button Because the Properties screen requires network connection with this product the information may not be reflected immediately Please wait awhile and then try updating the information again If the information is still not updated then check that the product is connected to the Internet If you do not receive the registration e mail You may have entered a different e mail addres...

Страница 103: ...after entering the correct password in iOS or Mac If you are using iOS or Mac and the password contains the symbol enter a backslash instead For instructions on entering a backslash see the OS help 103 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 104: ...t If you do not set a Security code another user may use your account This code is valid only when you use MAXIFY Cloud Link from the printer operation panel You cannot use this code when you access the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center from your smartphone tablet or computer 104 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 105: ...g Google Cloud Print 1 Preparations for Printing with Google Cloud Print 2 Printing from Computer or Smartphone with Google Cloud Print Important LAN connection with the printer and Internet connection are required to register the printer and to print with Google Cloud Print Internet connection fees apply This function may not be available depending on the country or region you live in 105 Downloa...

Страница 106: ... screen above may change without prior notice Registering the Printer with Google Cloud Print Register the printer with Google Cloud Print The authentication procedure using the web browser on the computer or the mobile device is required in the process of registering Because the authentication URL is printed from printer when the authentication process is performed prepare A4 or Letter sized plai...

Страница 107: ...d perform the authentication process following the on screen instructions Note Perform the authentication process with your Google account which you have gotten in advance 9 When the message that the registration is complete is displayed on the LCD of the printer select OK When authentication process is complete properly the registration items are displayed When authentication process is complete ...

Страница 108: ...b service setup Connection setup Google Cloud Print setup Delete from Google Cloud Print 4 When the confirmation screen to delete the printer is displayed select Yes 108 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 109: ...rvices supporting Google Cloud Print When the preparation for printing with Google Cloud Print is complete and when the printer is turned on the printer receives the print data and prints it automatically Note Depending on the communication status it may take a while to print the print data or the printer may not receive the print data While printing with Google Cloud Print the printing may be can...

Страница 110: ... immediately When the printer cannot receive the print data or you want to start printing immediately you can check whether there is a print job on the Google Cloud Print and start printing manually Follow the steps below Important Depending on your printer model this function may not be available 1 Make sure that the printer is turned on 2 From the Home screen select Setup 3 Select Web service in...

Страница 111: ...e AirPrint you will need one of the following Apple devices running the latest version of iOS iPad all models iPhone 3GS or later iPod touch 3rd generation or later Network Environment The Apple device iPad iPhone or iPod touch and this printer must be connected to the same Wi Fi network or connected in AP mode Printing with AirPrint 1 Check that this printer is turned on and the Apple device and ...

Страница 112: ...g Important Because some app does not support AirPrint Printer Options may not be displayed If an app does not let you use printer options you cannot print from that app Note The Printer Options differ depending on the app and model you are using 112 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 113: ...e device and the region in which AirPrint is used When Apple s photo app is used the default paper size is L size in Japan and 4 x6 or KG in other countries and regions When documents are printed from Apple s Safari app the default paper size is letter size in the U S region and A4 in Japan and Europe Important Your app may support different paper sizes Checking the Print Status During printing a ...

Страница 114: ...int Troubleshooting If the document does not print check the following 1 Check that the printer power is on If the printer power is on turn it off and then back on again and check whether the issue is resolved 2 Check that the printer is connected by LAN to the same network subnet as the device on which iOS is installed 3 Check that the printer has enough paper and ink 4 If your printer has a LCD ...

Страница 115: ...hat the printer is connected to the wireless LAN and then try printing If Bonjour on the printer is disabled AirPrint cannot be used Check the LAN settings on the printer and enable Bonjour Note The windows used in the explanations may differ from those displayed by your Apple product or app 115 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 116: ...onfirm LAN settings WLAN setting list or LAN setting list Then from the displayed window check the IP address 2 From your computer smartphone or tablet device open the Web browser and enter the following URL http Printer IP address For Printer IP address enter the IP address that you checked in the previous procedure 2 Entering Username and Administrator s Password From the authentication screen e...

Страница 117: ...ses and delete registered printers IJ Cloud Printing Center setup Allows you to register to IJ Cloud Printing Center or to delete a registration Security Allows you to set the Administrator s password and Operation restrictions for the machine Important For the initial Password see About the Administrator Password For Security reasons we recommend that you change the Password to an individual pass...

Страница 118: ...Manual Online This function displays the Online Manual 118 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 119: ...browsed from other computers smartphones etc To use Evernote you need to create an account See the CREATE ACCOUNT page of Evernote for account creation Settings In the Settings Dialog Box of IJ Scan Utility select the item you want to set then select Evernote for Send to an application in Application Settings Refer to Settings Dialog Box for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details Im...

Страница 120: ... product needs to be connected to a LAN with an Internet connection Important The user will bear the cost of Internet access This function may not be available in some countries regions Depending on your printer model this function may not be available Preparing to use Print from E mail To use Print from E mail you need to register the printer by entering information about the printer s owner 1 Pr...

Страница 121: ...les other than Adobe PDF files JPEG files and doc docx xls xlsx ppt pptx files cannot be printed Supported Number of Files and File Sizes Up to 10 attachment files can be printed The maximum size of an e mail with attachment files is 10 MB Note The size of an e mail is determined based on the size of the entire transmission file including the e mail message and the header Therefore sometimes an at...

Страница 122: ... on again and check whether the issue is resolved Check that the printer is connected to the network Check that the printer is connected to a LAN and the LAN has an Internet connection Look at the printer LCD monitor and check that no error message is displayed If the problem persists use the printer driver on your computer to execute printing and check whether the document can be printed normally...

Страница 123: ...Print from E mail Only the information on the printer was deleted is displayed it could be that the registration information on the service could not be deleted even though the Print from E mail information stored on this printer was deleted Select OK to release the error and then access the service s login URL https pr mp c ij com po to delete the registration information If the Print from E mail...

Страница 124: ...printer 3 Follow the instructions on the screen and print the printer registration URL and PIN code Important Do not turn off the power on the printer until the registration process is completed Access the printed URL and log in within 25 minutes If you canceled the registration before it is completed repeat the procedure from printing the registration information Access the Printed URL and Enter ...

Страница 125: ...name that you enter is displayed at login Important The maximum number of characters that can be entered is 30 Language Select the language that you are using The language that you select is used in notification e mails such as print start notices Time Zone Refer to this section and select the standard time of the city that is nearest to the region where you live Date Time Display Format Select th...

Страница 126: ...within 30 minutes 2 Enter the registered e mail address of the printer s owner the temporary password and select Log In 3 Set a password of your choice and select Register When the password setting process is completed the printer s e mail address and the service s URL are displayed and the printer s registration process is completed Important When you enter the password the following character re...

Страница 127: ...nhagen Madrid Paris Belgrade Bratislava Budapest Ljubljana Prague West Central Africa UTC 02 00 Athens Bucharest Istanbul Amman Windhoek Jerusalem Cairo Harare Pretoria Beirut Helsinki Kyiv Riga Sofia Tallinn Vilnius Minsk UTC 03 00 Kuwait Riyadh Tbilisi Nairobi Baghdad Moscow St Petersburg Volgograd Tehran UTC 04 00 Abu Dhabi Muscat Yerevan Baku Port Louis Kabul UTC 05 00 Islamabad Karachi Ekater...

Страница 128: ...ions to easily print photos saved on a smartphone or tablet wirelessly You can also receive scanned data PDF or JPEG directly on a smartphone or tablet without using a computer MAXIFY Printing Solutions can be downloaded from App Store and Google Play 128 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 129: ...m your computer smartphone or tablet device When the connection is complete the Canon Inkjet Print Utility software which allows you to specify detailed print settings is downloaded automatically By using Canon Inkjet Print Utility you can check the Printer status and specify detailed print settings The available functions will differ depending on your usage environment and connection method 129 D...

Страница 130: ...chine Settings Using the Operation Panel Registering the Favorite Settings Custom profiles Checking the Total Number of Uses of the Machine Information about Network Connection Useful Information about Network Connection About Network Communication Changing and Confirming Network Settings Screens for Network Connection of IJ Network Tool Other Screens of IJ Network Tool Appendix for Network Commun...

Страница 131: ...Safety Guide Safety Precautions Regulatory and Safety Information 131 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 132: ...he On screen Manual Do not place any object on the machine Especially do not place metal objects paper clips staples etc or containers of flammable solvents alcohol thinners etc on top of the machine Do not transport or use the machine on a slant vertically or upside down as the ink may leak and damage the machine Working around the machine For the multifunction printer When loading a thick book o...

Страница 133: ...isine d un bac à laver dans un sous sol humide ou près d une piscine 2 Éviter d utiliser l appareil pendant un orage électrique Ceci peut présenter un risque de choc électrique causé par la foudre 3 Ne pas utiliser l appareil pour signaler une fuite de gaz s il est situé près de la fuite ATTENTION Pour réduire les risques d incendie utiliser uniquement des conducteurs de télécommunications 26 AWG ...

Страница 134: ...at least 20cm between the radiator and persons body excluding extremities hands wrists feet and ankles and must not be colocated or operated with any other antenna or transmitter Canon U S A Inc One Canon Park Melville New York 11747 1 800 652 2666 Pre Installation Requirements Order Information When ordering service from the telephone company for this equipment the following may be required Unive...

Страница 135: ...nect service The telephone company also retains the right to make changes in facilities and services that may affect the operation of this equipment When such changes are necessary the telephone company is required to give adequate prior notice to the user However if advance notice is not possible the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also the customer will be advised ...

Страница 136: ...matériel est conforme aux spécifications techniques applicables d Industrie Canada L indice d équivalence de la sonnerie IES sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent être raccordés à une interface téléphonique La terminaison d une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs à la seule condition que la somme d indices d équivalence de la sonnerie de tous ...

Страница 137: ...ct will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources For more information about the recycling of this product please contact your local city office waste authority approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit www canon europe com weee or www canon europe com battery Korisnici u Srbiji Ovaj simbol označava da ovaj proizvod ne sme da se odlaže sa ostalim kućnim otpadom...

Страница 138: ...ctricity costs After the last print it switches to Ready Mode In this mode it can print again immediately if required If the product is not used for a time the device switches to its Power Save Mode The devices consume less power Watt in these modes If you wish to set a longer Activation Time or would like to completely deactivate the Power Save Mode please consider that this device may then only ...

Страница 139: ...139 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 140: ...Main Components and Basic Operations Main Components About the Power Supply of the Machine Using the Operation Panel Entering Numbers Letters and Symbols 140 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 141: ...Main Components Front View Rear View Inside View Operation Panel 141 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 142: ... to load a document in the ADF You can load two or more sheets of document of the same size and thickness Load the document with the side you want to scan facing up 6 document output slot Documents scanned from the ADF are delivered here 7 document cover Open to load an original on the platen glass 8 front cover Open to replace an ink tank or remove jammed paper inside the machine 9 paper output t...

Страница 143: ...metal casing Do not use the USB cable longer than 10 feet 3 meters to connect to the machine since it may affect the operation of other peripheral devices 13 cassette 1 Accepts all sizes of paper compatible with this machine plain paper photo paper envelopes etc Paper Sources to Load Paper 14 cassette 2 Accepts A4 Letter and Legal sized plain paper Paper Sources to Load Paper 15 platen glass Load ...

Страница 144: ... device such as telephone or answering machine 5 wired LAN connector Plug in the LAN cable to connect the machine to a LAN 6 USB port Plug in the USB cable to connect the machine with a computer Important Do not touch the metal casing Do not plug in or unplug the USB cable or LAN cable while the machine is printing or scanning originals with the computer 144 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manu...

Страница 145: ... tank eject lever Push up when removing an ink tank 2 print head holder The print head is pre installed Note For details on replacing an ink tank see Replacing an Ink Tank 145 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 146: ... displayed button Basic Operation of the touch screen 5 Black button Starts black white copying scanning faxing etc 6 Stop button Cancels operation when print copy scan or fax transmission reception job is in progress 7 Alarm lamp Lights or flashes when an error occurs 8 Color button Starts color copying scanning faxing etc 9 Back button Returns the screen to the previous screen 10 FAX Memory lamp...

Страница 147: ...Power Supply of the Machine Confirming that the Power Is On Turning the Machine On and Off Notice for the Power Plug Power Cord Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord 147 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 148: ... can operate the machine after you turn on its power Wait until the HOME screen is displayed on the touch screen The touch screen display will turn off if the machine is not operated for about 5 minutes To restore the display touch the touch screen The display will be also restored when receiving faxes or performing the print operation from a computer 148 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals...

Страница 149: ... message is displayed on the touch screen see A Message Is Displayed You can set the machine to automatically turn on at the specified day of week or time For details on Power control ON settings see below From the machine About ECO settings From the computer Managing the Printer Power Turning off the machine 1 Press the ON button to turn off the machine When the POWER lamp stops flashing the mach...

Страница 150: ... receiving a fax or when unsent faxes are stored in the machine s memory You can set the machine to automatically turn off at the specified day of week or time For details on Power control OFF settings see below From the machine About ECO settings From the computer Managing the Printer Power 150 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 151: ...g power cord is rusty The power plug power cord is bent The power plug power cord is worn The power plug power cord is split Caution If you find anything unusual with the power plug power cord described above unplug the power cord and call for service Using the machine with one of the unusual conditions above may cause a fire or an electric shock 151 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 152: ...g of the print head and print quality may be reduced If the power cord is unplugged all documents stored in the machine s memory will be lost Send or print a necessary document or save it on a USB flash drive before unplugging the power cord 1 Press the ON button to turn the machine off 2 Confirm that the POWER lamp is off 3 Unplug the power cord The specification of the power cord differs dependi...

Страница 153: ...ettings Important When operating the touch screen make sure to avoid the followings which may cause the machine to malfunction or damage the machine Strongly pressing the touch screen Pressing the touch screen with other than your finger especially with sharpened tips such as on ballpoint pens pencils or nails Touching the touch screen with wet or dirty hands Placing any objects on the touch scree...

Страница 154: ...he forward or back mark Flick Flick your finger on the screen up down left or right Use to switch menus or move forward or backward through photos Drag While lightly touching the screen move your finger up down left or right Use to view lists of items or move sliders 154 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 155: ...o display the print settings menu Drag the screen up or down then tap the option you want to select After the list is displayed tap the setting to select Tap B to display the screen for selecting the number of copies Tap the numbers to specify the number of copies then tap OK 155 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 156: ...n to enlarge or reduce the zoom while viewing the preview image at left Tapping or E also changes the zoom Hold your finger on or to continuously change the magnification After the copy magnification is selected tap OK 156 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 157: ...The machine has an alphabetic mode and number symbol mode To switch between them tap A at the bottom left To switch between lower and upper case modes in the alphabetic mode and the type of symbols in the number symbol mode tap B Note For unit telephone number entry or fax telephone number entry in the directory only the numbers and symbols available for that type of entry are displayed on the scr...

Страница 158: ...eleting characters To insert a space Tap F After entry is complete tap OK G Key assignments for multiple languages Repeatedly tap the same key until the character you want to enter is displayed in the entry field C Key Lower case Upper case a A a å ä á à ã â æ A Å Ä Á À Ã Â Æ c C c ç C Ç e E e ë é è ê E Ë É È Ê i I i ï í ì î I Ï Í Ì Î n N n ñ N Ñ o O o ø ö ó ò õ ô O Ø Ö Ó Ò Õ Ô p P p þ P Þ u U u ü...

Страница 159: ...Loading Paper Originals Loading Paper Loading Originals Inserting the USB Flash Drive 159 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 160: ...oading Paper Paper Sources to Load Paper Loading Plain Paper Photo Paper Loading Envelopes Media Types You Can Use Media Types You Cannot Use Printing Area 160 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 161: ...n set the machine to automatically switch the paper source and feed paper from the other cassette if paper in one cassette runs out Cassette settings Note When printing be sure to select the correct page size and media type If the wrong page size and media type are selected the machine may feed paper from the wrong paper source or may not print with the proper print quality For details on loading ...

Страница 162: ...t by pulling out the paper output tray Set the cassette to this position for normal use F Lock position for paper larger than A4 or Letter size For paper larger than A4 size such as Legal size set the cassette to the position F When the cassette is set to this position and inserted into the machine pulling out the paper output tray will not fully cover it The cassette sticks out of the machine Loa...

Страница 163: ...r the page size and paper weight you can use for this machine see Media Types You Can Use For loading envelopes see Loading Envelopes 1 Prepare paper Align the edges of paper If paper is curled flatten it Note Align the edges of paper neatly before loading Loading paper without aligning the edges may cause paper jams If paper is curled hold the curled corners and gently bend them in the opposite d...

Страница 164: ... Important Always load paper in the portrait orientation C Loading paper in the landscape orientation D can cause paper jams Note If paper has print side front or back such as photo paper load it with the whiter side or glossy side facing down Align the paper stack with the edge of the cassette as shown in the figure below 164 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 165: ...4 size in the cassette press down the lock G on the cassette then extend the cassette all the way out 5 Align the paper guide A in front with the paper stack For standard sizes set the paper guide A to where it clicks into place 6 Slide the paper guide B on the right to align the right and left guides with both sides of the paper stack Do not slide the paper guides too hard against the paper The p...

Страница 166: ...on registration screen for the cassette is displayed on the touch screen Note When A4 or Letter sized paper or smaller is loaded the cassette stops at the same position as the extended paper output tray which then covers the cassette When paper larger then A4 or Letter size is loaded the extended cassette protrudes beyond the paper output tray Do not force the cassette into the machine any further...

Страница 167: ... follow the directions in the message to complete registration Paper setting for Printing 9 Extend the output tray extension J then open the paper output support K Note When printing select the size and type of the loaded paper on the print settings screen of the operation panel or printer driver 167 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 168: ...eady moistened and adhesive 1 Prepare envelopes Press down on all four corners and edges of the envelopes to flatten them If the envelopes are curled hold the opposite corners and gently twist them in the opposite direction If the corner of the envelope flap is folded flatten it Use a pen to press the leading edge in the inserting direction flat and sharpen the crease The figures above show a side...

Страница 169: ...d place them in the center of the cassette 1 The folded flap of the envelope will be faced up as shown in the figure below C C Rear side D Address side Up to 10 envelopes can be loaded at once Note Align the envelope stack with the edge of the cassette 1 as shown in the figure below 169 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 170: ...ides too hard against the envelopes The envelopes may not be fed properly Note Do not load envelopes higher than the load limit mark F Keep the envelope stack height below the tabs G of the paper guides 7 Insert the cassette 1 into the machine Push the cassette 1 into the machine until it stops After inserting the cassette into the machine the paper information registration screen for the cassette...

Страница 171: ...pe then tap Register Paper setting for Printing 9 Extend the output tray extension H then open the paper output support I Note When printing select the size and type of the loaded envelopes on the print settings screen of the printer driver 171 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 172: ...non genuine papers depending on the country or region of purchase Paper is not sold in the US by Model Number Purchase paper by name Paper for printing photos Glossy Photo Paper Everyday Use GP 501 GP 601 Photo Paper Glossy GP 601 Photo Paper Plus Glossy II PP 201 Photo Paper Pro Luster LU 101 Photo Paper Plus Semi gloss SG 201 Matte Photo Paper MP 101 Paper for printing business documents High Re...

Страница 173: ... 8 50 x 14 00 inches 215 9 x 355 6 mm Paper Weight You can use paper in the following weight range 17 to 28 lb 64 to 105 g m2 plain paper except for Canon genuine paper Do not use heavier or lighter paper except for Canon genuine paper as it could jam in the machine Notes on Storing Paper Take out only the necessary number of paper from the package just before printing To avoid curling when you do...

Страница 174: ...ts A4 Letter 5 x 7 13 x 18 cm and 8 x 10 20 x 25 cm 20 sheets 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm Photo Paper Pro Luster LU 101 4 10 sheets A4 and Letter Photo Paper Plus Semi gloss SG 201 4 10 sheets A4 Letter 5 x 7 13 x 18 cm and 8 x 10 20 x 25 cm 20 sheets 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm Matte Photo Paper MP 101 10 sheets A4 and Letter 20 sheets 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm Paper for printing business documents Media Name Model No Cassette...

Страница 175: ... 4 When loading paper in stacks the print side may become marked as it is fed or paper may not feed properly In this case load one sheet at a time 175 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 176: ...t for Canon genuine paper Paper thinner than a postcard including plain paper or notepad paper cut to a small size when printing on paper smaller than A5 Picture postcards Postcards affixed with photos or stickers Envelopes with a double flap Envelopes with an embossed or treated surface Envelopes whose gummed flaps are already moistened and adhesive Any type of paper with holes Paper that is not ...

Страница 177: ...Printing Area Printing Area Other Sizes than Letter Legal Envelopes Letter Legal Envelopes 177 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 178: ... area Canon recommends that you print within this area Printable area The area where it is possible to print However printing in this area can affect the print quality or the paper feed precision Note With performing Automatic Duplex Printing and Duplex Two sided Copying the printable area will be 0 08 inch 2 mm smaller at the top margin 178 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 179: ... 2 x 249 0 mm 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm 3 73 x 5 69 inches 94 8 x 144 4 mm 5 x 7 13 x 18 cm 4 73 x 6 69 inches 120 2 x 169 8 mm 8 x 10 20 x 25 cm 7 73 x 9 69 inches 196 4 x 246 0 mm Recommended printing area A 1 80 inches 45 8 mm B 1 45 inches 36 8 mm Printable area C 0 12 inch 3 0 mm D 0 20 inch 5 0 mm E 0 13 inch 3 4 mm F 0 13 inch 3 4 mm 179 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 180: ...ches 203 2 x 271 4 mm Legal 8 00 x 13 69 inches 203 2 x 347 6 mm Recommended printing area A 1 80 inches 45 8 mm B 1 45 inches 36 8 mm Printable area C 0 12 inch 3 0 mm D 0 20 inch 5 0 mm E 0 25 inch 6 4 mm F 0 25 inch 6 3 mm 180 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 181: ...elope Com 10 3 68 x 8 24 inches 93 5 x 209 3 mm Recommended printing area Envelope DL A 0 83 inch 21 0 mm B 1 14 inches 29 0 mm C 0 22 inch 5 6 mm D 0 22 inch 5 6 mm Envelope Com 10 A 0 12 inch 3 0 mm B 1 14 inches 29 0 mm C 0 22 inch 5 6 mm D 0 22 inch 5 6 mm 181 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 182: ...sition to Load Originals Loading Originals on the Platen Glass Loading Documents in the ADF Auto Document Feeder How to Load Originals for Each Function Originals You Can Load 182 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 183: ...ge Originals You Can Load Loading Documents Photos or Book on the platen glass Loading Two or More Sheets of Document of the Same Size and Thickness in the ADF You can also load a sheet of document in the ADF Note In the ADF the two sided document can also be scanned or copied To scan the original at optimum quality load it on the platen glass 183 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 184: ...ortant Be sure to observe the following when loading the original on the platen glass Do not place any objects weighing 4 4 lb 2 0 kg or more on the platen glass Do not put any pressure of 4 4 lb 2 0 kg or more on the platen glass such as pressing down the original Failure to observe the above may cause the scanner to malfunction or the platen glass to break 3 Close the document cover gently Impor...

Страница 185: ...Load the document WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING UP in the document tray Originals You Can Load Note When you set the alarm to be silent in Sound control of Device user settings the alarm will not beep even if the document is inserted in the document tray Device user settings 4 Adjust the document guides A to match the width of the document Do not slide the document guides too hard against the docum...

Страница 186: ...E TO SCAN FACING DOWN on the platen glass and align it with the alignment mark Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned Important The machine cannot scan the striped area A 0 04 inch 1 mm from the edges of the platen glass Loading Only One Original in the Center of the platen glass Select Photo for Doc type in Scan and specify Auto scan for Scan size to scan one original Sc...

Страница 187: ...es diagonally striped area of the platen glass and the originals and between the originals Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned You can place up to 12 items A More than 0 4 inch 1 cm Note The Skew Correction function automatically compensates for the originals placed at an angle of up to approximately 10 degrees Slanted photos with a long edge of 7 1 inches 180 mm or mo...

Страница 188: ...ter sized documents for two sided copy scan 2 on 1 copy and 4 on 1 copy Quantity A4 or Letter size Max 50 sheets 20 lb 75 g m2 paper up to 0 20 inch 5 mm in height Legal size Max 10 sheets 20 lb 75 g m2 paper up to 0 04 inch 1 mm in height Other sizes 1 sheet Thickness 0 003 to 0 005 inch 0 07 to 0 13 mm Weight 16 0 to 25 3 lb 60 to 95 g m2 Note Make sure any glue ink correction fluid or the like ...

Страница 189: ... Paper with sticky notes Carbon paper or carbon backed paper Surface treated paper Onion skin or thin paper Photo or thick paper 189 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 190: ...Inserting the USB Flash Drive Inserting the USB Flash Drive Removing the USB Flash Drive 190 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 191: ...T technology licensed from Microsoft If your USB flash drive cannot be inserted into the USB flash drive port of the machine you may be required to use an extension cable for the USB flash drive Purchase it at electronics retail stores Some USB flash drives may have recognition problem and these devices may not guarantee proper operation of the machine You may not be able to use USB flash drives w...

Страница 192: ...ive or turn off the power while the machine is reading or writing data from to it Note If your USB flash drive has the access lamp refer to the instruction manual supplied with the USB flash drive to check if the reading or writing operation is completed on the USB flash drive 2 Remove the USB flash drive Hold the USB flash drive and remove it straightforward from the machine 192 Downloaded from M...

Страница 193: ...Replacing an Ink Tank Replacing an Ink Tank Checking the Ink Status 193 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 194: ...roperly Once an ink tank has been installed do not remove it from the machine and leave it out in the open This will cause the ink tank to dry out and the machine may not operate properly when it is reinstalled To maintain optimal printing quality use an ink tank within six months of first use Note Color ink may be consumed even when printing a black and white document or when black and white prin...

Страница 195: ...ion Removing it forcibly may cause the machine to malfunction or damage the machine Do not touch the metallic parts or other parts inside the machine If the front cover is left open for more than 60 minutes the print head holder moves to the right In this case close and reopen the front cover Note If the message for the ink tank replacement is displayed on the touch screen check it and then tap OK...

Страница 196: ...t touch other parts besides the ink tanks Discard the empty ink tank according to the local laws and regulations regarding disposal of consumables Handle the ink tanks carefully Do not drop or apply excessive pressure to them 3 Remove the ink tank from the package Important Do not touch the contact C and joint D of the ink tank 196 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 197: ...he machine Important You cannot insert the ink tank in the wrong position Check the label under the installation position then install the ink tank in the correct position 5 Push the ink tank until it snaps firmly into place 197 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 198: ...nk replacement tap Next until Exit is displayed on the screen The print head holder moves to the standby position You cannot remove the ink tank while at this position Important You cannot print unless all the ink tanks are installed Be sure to install all the ink tanks An installed ink tank cannot be removed until the message to replace it is displayed 7 Close the front cover 198 Downloaded from ...

Страница 199: ...akes about 1 to 2 minutes Note If the error message appears on the touch screen take appropriate action A Message Is Displayed If the print head is out of alignment as indicated by misaligned printed ruled lines or similar symptoms align the print head The machine may make noise during operation 199 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 200: ...he Canon IJ Status Monitor may differ depending on the country or region where you are using your printer 3 If necessary click Ink Details You can check the ink related information If a warning or error related to the remaining ink amount occurs a notification icon is displayed at the top of the image in the Ink Details dialog box In such cases take the appropriate action as described on the scree...

Страница 201: ...k Status Checking the Ink Status with the Touch Screen on the Machine You can also check the ink status on the computer screen Checking the Ink Status from Your Computer 201 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 202: ...nk tank is running low Prepare a new ink tank Note The above screen shows estimated ink levels The Current estimated ink levels screen can also be displayed by tapping Setup in the HOME screen and selecting Estimated ink levels in the setup menu Tap Ink number to display and print the model number of the ink tank You can also check the ink status on a screen of the touch screen displayed while pri...

Страница 203: ...Maintenance When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Performing Maintenance from a Computer Cleaning the Machine 203 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 204: ...t Maintenance Procedure Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Cleaning the Print Head Cleaning the Print Head Deeply Aligning the Print Head Aligning the Print Head Manually 204 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 205: ...pattern If there are missing lines or horizontal white streaks in the pattern Step3 Clean the print head From the machine Cleaning the Print Head From the computer Cleaning the Print Heads from Your Computer After cleaning the print head print and examine the nozzle check pattern Step1 If the problem is not resolved after performing from step 1 to step 3 twice Step4 Clean the print head deeply Fro...

Страница 206: ...the service center When the Print Results Are Not Even such as the Ruled Lines Are Misaligned Step Align the print head From the machine Aligning the Print Head From the computer Aligning the Print Head Position from Your Computer 206 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 207: ...machine the paper information registration screen is displayed on the touch screen Select A4 or Letter for Page size and Plain paper for Type then tap Register If a message is displayed on the screen follow the directions in the message to complete registration Important The cassette 2 is not available for the nozzle check pattern print procedure Be sure to load paper in the cassette 1 3 Extend th...

Страница 208: ...creen will appear 7 Tap Yes The nozzle check pattern will be printed and two pattern confirmation screens will appear on the touch screen 8 Examine the nozzle check pattern 208 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 209: ...ks B Lines are missing Horizontal white streaks are present E Number of sheets printed so far 2 Select the pattern that is closer to the printed nozzle check pattern on the confirmation screen For A no missing lines or no horizontal white streaks in both the pattern C and pattern D The cleaning is not required Tap All A confirm the message then tap OK The screen will return to the Maintenance scre...

Страница 210: ...leaning is required Tap Also B then tap Yes on the cleaning confirmation screen The machine starts cleaning the print head Cleaning the Print Head Note The total number of sheets printed so far is shown in increments of 50 sheets on the printout of the nozzle check pattern 210 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 211: ...ed plain paper 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Load a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the cassette 1 After inserting the cassette into the machine the paper information registration screen is displayed on the touch screen Select A4 or Letter for Page size and Plain paper for Type then tap Register If a message is displayed on the screen follow the directions in the message to ...

Страница 212: ...hine completes the cleaning of the print head This takes about 2 minutes The pattern print confirmation screen will appear 8 Tap Yes The nozzle check pattern will be printed 9 Examine the nozzle check pattern Note If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the print head twice clean the print head deeply 212 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 213: ...er sized plain paper 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Load a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the cassette 1 After inserting the cassette into the machine the paper information registration screen is displayed on the touch screen Select A4 or Letter for Page size and Plain paper for Type then tap Register If a message is displayed on the screen follow the directions in the messa...

Страница 214: ...t confirmation screen will appear 8 Tap Yes The nozzle check pattern will be printed 9 When the completion message appears tap OK 10 Examine the nozzle check pattern If the problem is not resolved turn off the power and clean the print head deeply again after 24 hours Do not unplug the power cord when turning off the power If the problem is still not resolved the print head may be damaged Contact ...

Страница 215: ...cassette 1 After inserting the cassette into the machine the paper information registration screen is displayed on the touch screen Select A4 or Letter for Page size and Plain paper for Type then tap Register If a message is displayed on the screen follow the directions in the message to complete registration Important The cassette 2 is not available for the print head alignment procedure Be sure ...

Страница 216: ...ition has failed the error message appears on the touch screen A Message Is Displayed 8 When the completion message appears tap OK Note If the print results are still not satisfactory after adjusting the print head position as described above align the print head manually You can also align the print head manually from a computer Aligning the Print Head Position Manually from Your Computer 216 Dow...

Страница 217: ...assette into the machine the paper information registration screen is displayed on the touch screen Select A4 or Letter for Page size and Plain paper for Type then tap Register If a message is displayed on the screen follow the directions in the message to complete registration Important The cassette 2 is not available for the manual print head alignment procedure Be sure to load paper in the cass...

Страница 218: ...ssage Did the patterns print correctly appears confirm that the pattern is printed correctly tap Yes 9 Confirm the message then tap Next The input screen for the head position adjustment values will appear 10 Look at the first pattern tap A to check the printed patterns then tap the number of the pattern in column A that has the least noticeable vertical streaks 218 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter ...

Страница 219: ... 11 Repeat the same procedure until you finish inputting the pattern number for columns B to M then tap OK 12 Confirm the message then tap OK The second pattern is printed 13 Look at the second pattern tap N to check the printed patterns then tap the number of the pattern in column N that has the least noticeable horizontal streaks 219 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 220: ...treaks C Unnoticeable horizontal streaks D Noticeable horizontal streaks 1 Repeat the same procedure until you finish inputting the pattern number for columns O to T then tap OK For column P pick the least noticeable vertical streaks 2 Confirm the message then tap OK 220 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 221: ...tenance from a Computer Cleaning the Print Heads from Your Computer Aligning the Print Head Position from Your Computer Use Your Computer to Print a Nozzle Check Pattern 221 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 222: ...inter is on and then click Execute Print head cleaning starts 4 Complete cleaning The Nozzle Check dialog box opens after the confirmation message 5 Check the results To check whether the print quality has improved click Print Check Pattern To cancel the check process click Cancel If cleaning the head once does not resolve the print head problem clean it once more Important Cleaning consumes a sma...

Страница 223: ...quality has improved click Print Check Pattern To cancel the check process click Cancel Important Deep Cleaning consumes a larger amount of ink than Cleaning Cleaning the print head frequently will rapidly deplete your printer s ink supply Consequently perform cleaning only when necessary Note If there is no sign of improvement after Deep Cleaning turn off the printer wait 24 hours and then perfor...

Страница 224: ... The cassette 2 is not available for the print head alignment procedure Be sure to load paper in the cassette 1 Note The number of sheets to be used differs when you select the manual head alignment If the cassette paper information registered on the printer is not set to A4 size and plain paper an error may occur For instructions on what to do if an error occurs see Paper setting for Printing For...

Страница 225: ...Note To print and check the current setting open the Start Print Head Alignment dialog box and click Print Alignment Value 225 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 226: ...ppear because the computer cannot collect the printer status If this happens click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer 3 Switch head alignment to manual Check the Align heads manually check box 4 Apply the settings Click OK and when the confirmation message appears click OK 5 Click Print Head Alignment on the Maintenance tab The Start Print Head Alignment dialog box o...

Страница 227: ...ks in the associated boxes Even if the patterns with the least noticeable streaks are clicked in the preview window their numbers are automatically entered in the associated boxes When you have entered all the necessary values click OK Note If it is difficult to pick the best pattern pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical streaks A Least noticeable vertical streaks B Most not...

Страница 228: ...OK Note If it is difficult to pick the best pattern pick the setting that produces the least noticeable horizontal stripes A Least noticeable horizontal stripes B Most noticeable horizontal stripes If it is difficult to pick the best pattern pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical streaks A Least noticeable vertical streaks B Most noticeable vertical streaks Note To print and ...

Страница 229: ...ing Be sure to load paper in the cassette 1 Note If the cassette paper information registered on the printer is not set to A4 size and plain paper an error may occur For instructions on what to do if an error occurs see Paper setting for Printing For details about the cassette paper information to be registered on the printer see the following Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer M...

Страница 230: ...Related Topic Cleaning the Print Heads from Your Computer 230 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 231: ...hine Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover Cleaning the ADF Auto Document Feeder Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller Cleaning the Inside of the Machine Bottom Plate Cleaning Cleaning the Pad in the Cassette 231 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 232: ...red in the machine s memory will be lost Send or print a necessary document or save it on a USB flash drive before unplugging the power cord Do not use tissue paper paper towels rough textured cloth or similar materials for cleaning so as not to scratch the surface Paper tissue powder or fine threads may remain inside the machine and cause problems such as print head blockage and poor printing res...

Страница 233: ...ot to scratch the surface Paper tissue powder or fine threads may remain inside the machine and cause problems such as print head blockage and poor printing results Never use volatile liquids such as thinners benzene acetone or any other chemical cleaner to clean the machine as this may cause a malfunction or damage the surface of the machine Use a soft clean lint free and dry cloth Wipe away smud...

Страница 234: ...d in the machine s memory will be lost Send or print a necessary document or save it on a USB flash drive before unplugging the power cord Do not use tissue paper paper towels rough textured cloth or similar materials for cleaning so as not to scratch the surface Paper tissue powder or fine threads may remain inside the machine and cause problems such as print head blockage and poor printing resul...

Страница 235: ...4 After wiping close the document feeder cover by pushing it until it clicks into place 5 Close the document tray 235 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 236: ...creen will appear 3 Tap Maintenance The Maintenance screen will appear 4 Tap Roller cleaning The confirmation screen will appear 5 Tap Yes 6 Tap the paper source to clean Cassette 1 or Cassette 2 7 Follow the message to remove any paper from the paper source you selected in step 6 8 Tap OK The paper feed roller will rotate as it is cleaned 9 Make sure that the paper feed roller has stopped rotatin...

Страница 237: ...e cleaning will be complete when the paper is ejected 12 When the completion message appears tap OK If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the paper feed roller contact the service center 237 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 238: ...Flick the HOME screen then tap Setup Using the Operation Panel The setup menu screen will appear 3 Tap Maintenance The Maintenance screen will appear 4 Tap Bottom plate cleaning The confirmation screen will appear 5 Tap Yes 6 Follow the message to remove any paper from the cassette 1 then tap OK 7 Fold a single sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in half widthwise then unfold the paper 8 Fold ...

Страница 239: ...tom Plate Cleaning again 12 When the completion message appears tap OK Note When performing Bottom Plate Cleaning again be sure to use a new piece of paper If the problem is not resolved after performing cleaning again the protrusions inside the machine may be stained Wipe off any ink from the protrusions using a cotton swab or the like Important Be sure to turn off the power and unplug the power ...

Страница 240: ...ower is turned off If the power cord is unplugged all documents stored in the machine s memory will be lost Send or print a necessary document or save it on a USB flash drive before unplugging the power cord 240 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 241: ...te 2 from the machine then remove all the paper 2 Clean the pad A sideways with a moistened cotton swab Important After cleaning the smeared pad dry it completely For an example of the cassette 1 3 Reload the paper then insert the cassette into the machine Note If a message is displayed on the screen after inserting the cassette into the machine tap Register If the problem is not resolved contact ...

Страница 242: ...g Machine Settings from Your Computer Changing the Machine Settings Using the Operation Panel Registering the Favorite Settings Custom profiles Checking the Total Number of Uses of the Machine 242 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 243: ...rom Your Computer Changing the Print Options Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Managing the Printer Power Reducing the Printer Noise Changing the Printer Operation Mode 243 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 244: ...or printing fails The procedure for changing the print options is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Print Options on the Page Setup tab The Print Options dialog box opens Note When you use the XPS printer driver the functions available to you are different 3 Change the individual settings If necessary change the setting of each item and then click OK The Page Setup tab is d...

Страница 245: ...ngs on the Quick Setup tab select the printing profile to be used and if necessary change the settings after Additional Features You can also register necessary items on the Main and Page Setup tabs 3 Click Save The Save Commonly Used Settings dialog box opens 4 Save the settings Enter a name in the Name field If necessary click Options set the items and then click OK In the Save Commonly Used Set...

Страница 246: ...rved If a profile is deleted register the print settings again Deleting Unnecessary Printing Profile 1 Select the printing profile to be deleted Select the printing profile you want to delete from the Commonly Used Settings list on the Quick Setup tab 2 Delete the printing profile Click Delete When the confirmation message appears click OK The selected printing profile is deleted from the Commonly...

Страница 247: ... you use this function you will not be able to turn the printer on from the printer driver 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Execute power off Click Power Off on the Maintenance tab When the confirmation message appears click OK The printer power switches off and the Maintenance tab is displayed again Important You cannot receive faxes when the printer is switched off 247 Downloaded from Ma...

Страница 248: ...se quiet mode Select this option when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the printer Use quiet mode during specified hours Select this option when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the printer during a specified period of time Set the Start time and the End time of the quiet mode you wish to be activated If both are set to the same time the quiet mode will not function Important You...

Страница 249: ...t you can change it to manual head alignment If the printing results of automatic print head alignment are not satisfactory perform manual head alignment Check this check box to perform the manual head alignment Uncheck this check box to perform the automatic head alignment Rotate 90 degrees left when orientation is Landscape On the Page Setup tab you can change the rotation direction of the Lands...

Страница 250: ...eft decreases the time If the paper gets stained because the next page is ejected before the ink on the printed page dries increase the ink drying wait time Reducing the ink drying wait time speeds up printing 4 Apply the settings Click OK and when the confirmation message appears click OK The printer operates with the modified settings hereafter 250 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 251: ...FAX settings Print settings LAN settings Device user settings Language selection Firmware update Cassette settings Administrator password setting Operation restrictions Reset setting About ECO settings About Quiet setting Using the Machine with the Access Point Mode 251 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 252: ...paper abrasion as an example 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Flick the HOME screen then tap Setup Using the Operation Panel 3 Tap Device settings The Device settings screen is displayed 4 Tap the setting item to adjust The setting screen for the selected item is displayed 5 Tap the setting item 6 Tap the setting to specify 252 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 253: ...tion by the administrator password is required About the Machine Administration If you do not know the administrator password ask the administrator of the machine you are using Note You can use the machine considering the environment such as setting 2 sided printing as default or enabling the machine to turn on off automatically About ECO settings You can reduce the operating noise when printing a...

Страница 254: ...e other than China Selects the telephone line type setting for the machine Setting the Telephone Line Type Note This setting may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase Telephone line auto selection China only If you select ON the telephone line type is selected automatically If you select OFF you can select the telephone line type manually Setting the Telephone Line Type A...

Страница 255: ...ng RX image reduction Enables disables automatic reduction of incoming faxes so that they fit in the selected paper If you select ON you can select the image reduction direction Adv communication settings ECM TX Selects whether to send faxes in Error Correction Mode ECM Transmission Reception of Faxes Using ECM ECM RX Selects whether to receive faxes in Error Correction Mode ECM Transmission Recep...

Страница 256: ...ting that the first page of the fax is printed along with the report RX report Selects whether to print RX REPORT automatically after receiving a fax If you print RX REPORT select Print error only or Print for each RX Print when out of ink Sets whether to continue printing the received fax without storing it in the machine s memory when the ink has run out However part or all of the fax may not be...

Страница 257: ... ID matches the condition specified in this setting the machine rejects the phone call or fax reception from the sender If you select Yes on the subscribing confirmation screen you can specify the settings of rejection Using the Caller ID Service to Reject Calls Note This setting may not be supported depending on the country or region of purchase Contact your telephone company to confirm whether i...

Страница 258: ...sion Use this setting only if the print surface becomes smudged Important Be sure to set this back to OFF after printing since it may result in lower printing speed or lower print quality 258 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 259: ...orting a Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS push button method Follow the on screen instructions during setup Other setup Advanced setup Select when you perform settings for wireless LAN manually You can specify multiple WEP keys WPS PIN code method Select when you perform settings for wireless LAN using an access point supporting a Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS PIN code method Follow the on screen instruction...

Страница 260: ...dress XX XX XX XX XX XX IPsec settings Enable ESP Enable ESP AH Enable AH Disable Pre shared key XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Printer name XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Bonjour service name XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XX represents alphanumeric characters LAN setting list The list of wired LAN settings of this machine is displayed on the touch screen The following setting items are displayed Ite...

Страница 261: ...The following setting items are displayed Items Setting Connection Active Inactive SSID XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Password XXXXXXXXXX Communication mode Access point mode Channel 3 Wireless LAN security Inactive WPA2 PSK AES IPv4 address XXX XXX XXX XXX IPv4 subnet mask XXX XXX XXX XXX IPv4 default gateway XXX XXX XXX XXX IPv6 address XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX IPv6 subnet pre...

Страница 262: ...lready used for other LAN connected devices You cannot use a hyphen for the initial or last character of the printer name TCP IP settings Performs IPv4 or IPv6 setting WSD setting Setting items when you use WSD one of the network protocols supported in Windows 8 1 Windows 8 Windows 7 and Windows Vista Enable disable WSD Selects whether WSD is enabled or disabled Note When this setting is enabled t...

Страница 263: ...s point you are using discontinuous reception may not be activated even though Enable is selected Discontinuous reception is activated only while the machine is on standby The touch screen is in the screen saver mode Wired LAN DRX setting Selecting Enable allows you to activate discontinuous reception when the machine is connected to a device compatible with wired LAN It allows you to save electri...

Страница 264: ...epending on the country or region of purchase Start date time Sets the date and time that summer time starts Month Specify the month Week Specify the week DOW Specify the day of the week The screen to set the shift time to start summer time will be displayed after specifying the items above and tapping OK After specifying the shift time and tapping OK you can specify the end date time End date tim...

Страница 265: ...egion where you are using the machine Note This setting may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase Device info sending setting Selects whether you will send the printer usage information to Canon server The information sent to Canon will be utilized to develop better products Select Agree to send the printer usage information to Canon server 265 Downloaded from ManualsPrin...

Страница 266: ...Language selection Important This setting item is for the administrator Changes the language for the messages and menus on the touch screen 266 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 267: ...x in machine s memory memory reception When the unsent faxes are stored in the machine s memory Note If the firmware update is not complete check the following and take an appropriate action When using wired LAN make sure that the machine is connected to the computer with a LAN cable properly Check the network settings such as an access point or a router If Cannot connect to the server is displaye...

Страница 268: ...rinter driver or on the touch screen Setting the Media Type with the Printer Driver and on the Printer Setting the Paper Size with the Printer Driver and on the Printer Detect paper setting mismatch If you select Yes the machine detects whether the paper size and the media type are identical with those registered in Register cassette paper info If printing starts with the settings that do not matc...

Страница 269: ...sword setting Operation restrictions Reset setting When the confirmation screen to specify the administrator password is displayed tap Yes When the message is displayed tap OK The screen to show the range where the administrator password is valid is displayed Select the range then specify the administrator password 0 to 32 alphanumeric characters Remote UI Network Tool Entering the administrator p...

Страница 270: ...h drive Restricts to save the scanned data on a USB flash drive Scan to destination folder Restricts to forward the scanned data to a shared folder on the computer FAX transmission Restricts to send a fax Note Sending a fax from a computer is not restricted even when Restrict is selected FAX reception Restricts to receive a fax Important If the machine receives a fax while Restrict is selected Not...

Страница 271: ... the default The LAN settings and the telephone fax number are not reverted Device info sending setting only Reverts only the device information sending settings FAX settings only Reverts the fax settings to the default Disconnect the telephone line from the machine before you revert this setting item After resetting perform setup again as necessary Reset all Reverts all settings you made to the m...

Страница 272: ...tings screen Setting the Sender Information 2 Tap the user s name or the telephone number then delete all characters or numbers 3 Tap OK when you finished deleting all characters or numbers 272 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 273: ...he procedure below to use duplex printing 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Flick the HOME screen then tap ECO settings Using the Operation Panel 3 Tap Two sided printing setting 4 Specify the settings as necessary A Tap to select two sided copying as a default B Tap to select duplex printing PDF files saved on a USB flash drive as a default C Tap to select two sided printing of sent rec...

Страница 274: ...Using the Operation Panel 3 Tap Power control 4 Specify the settings as necessary When you specify the time and day to turn the machine on 1 Tap Power control ON settings 2 Tap ON on the displayed screen The screen below is displayed 3 Tap the time The screen below is displayed 4 Tap the numbers to specify the time to turn the machine on 274 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 275: ...off 1 Tap Power control OFF settings 2 Tap ON on the displayed screen The screen below is displayed 3 Tap the time The screen below is displayed 4 Tap the numbers to specify the time to turn the machine off You can specify the hour from 0 to 24 and specify the minute in increments of 10 minutes 5 Tap OK to confirm the time to turn the machine off After confirming the time to turn the machine off t...

Страница 276: ...ation If you do not know the administrator password ask the administrator of the machine you are using Follow the procedure below to perform setting 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Flick the HOME screen then tap Quiet setting Using the Operation Panel 3 Tap Use quiet mode or Use during specified hours When Use quiet mode is selected The confirmation screen is displayed then the icon ap...

Страница 277: ...menu icon Important Operating speed may be reduced compared to when the quiet mode is not selected This function may not be so effective depending on the machine s setting Furthermore certain noise such as when the machine is preparing for printing is not reduced Note You can set the quiet mode from the operation panel of the machine the printer driver or ScanGear scanner driver No matter how you ...

Страница 278: ...irm the usage restrictions then switch the machine to the access point mode Restrictions If you use the machine with the access point mode for the long time it is recommended that you change the default access point name and the default password to the combination of numbers and letters with the point of view of security How to enable the Access Point Mode Enable the access point mode following th...

Страница 279: ...th an external device refer to the device s instruction manual When a WPA2 PSK AES password is valid on the machine entering the password is required to connect an external device to the machine via wireless LAN Enter the password specified for the machine 2 Start printing or scanning from an external device such as a computer or a smartphone Note For details on how to print or scan from an extern...

Страница 280: ...point mode settings The screen to enter the access point name SSID is displayed 7 Tap the touch screen 8 Enter the access point name up to 32 characters Enter the access point name when you use the machine as an access point 9 Tap OK to finish entering the name 10 Tap OK to finish specifying the access point name 11 Select the security setting Disable Finishes the access point settings without spe...

Страница 281: ... the password 15 Tap OK to finish specifying the password setting Note If you change the access point mode setting of the machine also change the access point setting of the external device such as a computer or a smartphone 281 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 282: ...of Save profile is displayed tap Yes When the screen to enter the name of the setting is displayed enter the name then tap Register Note If you tap Register without entering the name the name currently shown is applied as the name of the setting Calling Up the Registered Setting Follow the procedure below to call up the registered setting 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Flick the HOME ...

Страница 283: ...s 1 Tap Rearrange 2 Tap the setting you want to move 3 Tap or to move the selected setting 4 Tap Apply 5 Tap Exit To change the name of the registered settings 1 Tap Rename 2 Tap the setting you want to rename 3 Enter the new name then tap OK Entering Numbers Letters and Symbols 4 Tap Exit To delete the registered settings 1 Tap Delete 2 Tap the setting you want to delete 3 Tap Yes on the displaye...

Страница 284: ...ided or 4 on 1 copying One sided Two sided respectively No of sheets used for FAX Displays the total number of received or printed faxes You can check the total number of black and white printing color printing One sided printing or Two sided printing respectively Sheets used for other functions Displays the total number of printing other than copying or faxing You can check the total number of bl...

Страница 285: ...Information about Network Connection Useful Information about Network Connection 285 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 286: ...necting the Machine to the Computer Using a USB Cable When Detecting the Printers Have the Same Name during Setup Connecting to Other Computer with LAN Changing the Connection Method from USB to LAN Printing Out Network Setting Information 286 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 287: ...ble Service name Canon MB5300 series LPR protocol setting Enable Wireless LAN DRX setting Enable Wired LAN DRX setting Enable XX represents alphanumeric characters The default value in this item varies by machine You can check the value in this item using the operation panel on the machine LAN settings Default Values of the Access Point Mode Item The default SSID access point name XXXXXX MB5300ser...

Страница 288: ...chine to the Computer Using a USB Cable Connect the machine and the computer using a USB cable as the illustration below The USB port is located on the rear of the machine 288 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 289: ...erial number may not be displayed on the detection result screen To check the MAC address of the printer print out the network setting information using the operation panel of the printer Printing Out Network Setting Information Additionally you can check the network setting information on the touch screen of the printer Select WLAN setting list from Confirm LAN settings in LAN settings under Devi...

Страница 290: ...site Connecting to Other Computer with LAN To add the computer connecting the machine with LAN perform setup with the Setup CD ROM or perform it according to the instructions on our website Changing the Connection Method from USB to LAN To change the connection method to LAN while you are using the machine with USB connection perform setup again with the Setup CD ROM or perform it again according ...

Страница 291: ...tails 8 Tap Yes The machine starts printing the network setting information The following information on the machine s network setting is printed out Item Explanations of the item Setting Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Enable Disable Connection Connection status Active Inactive MAC Address MAC Address XX XX XX XX XX XX SSID SSID SSID of the wireless LAN SSID of the access point mode Password Password P...

Страница 292: ...wireless LAN Enable Disable Wired LAN Wired LAN Enable Disable Connection Status of the Wired LAN Active Inactive MAC Address MAC Address XX XX XX XX XX XX TCP IP Version TCP IP Version IPv4 IPv6 IPv4 IPv4 IP Address Selected IP Address IPv4 XXX XXX XXX XXX IPv4 Default Gateway Default Gateway IPv4 XXX XXX XXX XXX Subnet Mask Subnet Mask XXX XXX XXX XXX IPv6 IP Address 2 Selected IP Address IPv6 X...

Страница 293: ...ss XXX XXX XXX XXX Secondary Server Secondary server address XXX XXX XXX XXX Proxy Server Proxy Server setting Enable Disable Proxy Port Specifying Proxy Port 1 to 65535 Proxy Address Proxy Address XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XX represents alphanumeric characters 1 Depending on the country or region of purchase one of the channels from 1 to 11 is printed 2 Only when IPv6 is enabled the status of the netw...

Страница 294: ...mmunication Changing and Confirming Network Settings Screens for Network Connection of IJ Network Tool Other Screens of IJ Network Tool Appendix for Network Communication 294 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 295: ... WEP Detailed Settings Changing the WPA WPA2 Detailed Settings Changing the Settings in the Wired LAN Sheet Changing the Settings in the Admin Password Sheet Monitoring Wireless Network Status Initializing the Network Settings of the Machine Viewing the Modified Settings 295 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 296: ...ching It is recommended to exit IJ Network Tool when switching users Starting up IJ Network Tool 1 Start up IJ Network Tool as shown below In Windows 8 1 or Windows 8 select IJ Network Tool on the Start screen to start IJ Network Tool If IJ Network Tool is not displayed on the Start screen select the Search charm then search for IJ Network Tool In Windows 7 Windows Vista or Windows XP click Start ...

Страница 297: ...LAN sheet 1 Start up IJ Network Tool 2 Select the printer in Printers When the printer is connected to the computer with a USB cable temporarily select the printer with USBnnn where n is a number appearing in the Port Name column 3 Select Configuration from the Settings menu 4 Click the Wireless LAN tab The Wireless LAN sheet is displayed For details on the Wireless LAN sheet see Wireless LAN Shee...

Страница 298: ... printer was switched make sure that encryption types for the computer and the access point match that set to the printer If you connect to a network that is not protected with security measures there is a risk of disclosing data such as your personal information to a third party TCP IP Setup Sets the IP address of the printer to be used over the LAN Specify a value appropriate for your network en...

Страница 299: ...porarily select the printer with USBnnn where n is a number appearing in the Port Name column 3 Select Configuration from the Settings menu 4 Click the Wireless LAN tab 5 Select Use WEP in Encryption Method and click Configuration The WEP Details screen is displayed 6 Change the settings or confirm When changing the password WEP key the same change must be made to the password WEP key of the acces...

Страница 300: ...d manually select Open System or Shared Key according to the setting of the access point 7 Click OK Important If the printer cannot communicate with the computer after the encryption type of the printer was switched make sure that encryption types for the computer and the access point match that set to the printer Note Changing the network settings with the USB cable temporarily may switch the def...

Страница 301: ... refer to the WPA detailed settings 1 Start up IJ Network Tool 2 Select the printer in Printers When the printer is connected to the computer with a USB cable temporarily select the printer with USBnnn where n is a number appearing in the Port Name column 3 Select Configuration from the Settings menu 4 Click the Wireless LAN tab 5 Select Use WPA WPA2 in Encryption Method and click Configuration Th...

Страница 302: ...cess point passphrase refer to the instruction manual provided with the access point or contact its manufacturer The dynamic encryption method is selected from either TKIP basic encryption or AES secure encryption automatically Important If Auto is not displayed on Dynamic Encryption Type select either TKIP Basic Encryption or AES Secure Encryption 9 Click Finish 302 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter...

Страница 303: ...er was switched make sure that encryption types for the computer and the access point match that set to the printer Note Changing the network settings with the USB cable temporarily may switch the default printer In this case reset Set as Default Printer 303 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 304: ...red LAN tab The Wired LAN sheet is displayed For details on the Wired LAN sheet see Wired LAN Sheet 5 Change the settings or confirm Set the IP address of the printer to be used over the LAN Specify a value appropriate for your network environment 6 Click OK After changing configuration a screen is displayed asking you for confirmation before the settings are sent to the printer If you click Yes t...

Страница 305: ... password select the Use admin password check box and enter a password Important The password should consist of alphanumeric characters and be no longer than 32 characters The password is case sensitive Do not forget the password you set If you forget the administrator password you specified initialize the printer to revert the password to the default setting 6 Click OK A screen is displayed askin...

Страница 306: ... menu The Status screen is displayed and you can check the printer status and connection performance Important If the indicated value is low move your printer closer to the wireless network device 4 If you measure the connection performance in detail click Advanced Measurement The Connection Performance Measurement screen is displayed 5 Click Next The measurement starts and the status displays Mea...

Страница 307: ...ations Check that there are no sources of radio interference near the printer and the access point The wireless connection may use the same frequency band as microwave ovens and other sources of radio interference Try to keep the printer and the access point away from such sources Check if the radio channel of the access point is close to that of other access points nearby If the radio channel of ...

Страница 308: ...urement then restart the IJ Network Tool to start over the measurement 7 Click Finish Note If any messages appear on Overall Network Performance move the machine and access point as instructed to improve the performance 308 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 309: ...yed 4 Click Initialize 5 When the confirmation screen is displayed click Yes The network settings of the printer is initialized Do not turn off the printer during initialization Click OK when initialization is complete Performing initialization when connected over wireless LAN will break the connection so perform setup with the Setup CD ROM or perform setup according to the instructions on our web...

Страница 310: ...creen is displayed when you modified the printer settings on the Configuration screen When you click Yes on the Confirmation screen the following screen is displayed for confirming the modified settings 310 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 311: ...ation Type Confirmation Screen PSK Passphrase and Dynamic Encryption Setup Screen Setup Information Confirmation Screen Wired LAN Sheet Admin Password Sheet Network Information Screen Access Control Sheet Edit Accessible MAC Address Screen Add Accessible MAC Address Screen Edit Accessible IP Address Screen Add Accessible IP Address Screen 311 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 312: ...ter is not displayed Important To change the printer s network settings using IJ Network Tool it must be connected via a LAN If No Driver is displayed for the name associate the port with the printer When the Printer Driver Is Not Associated with a Port If Not Found is displayed for the status check the followings The access point is turned on When using wired LAN the LAN cable is connected proper...

Страница 313: ... IJ Network Tool screen 1 File menu Exit Exits IJ Network Tool 2 View menu Status Displays the Status screen to confirm the printer connection status and wireless communication status In the access point mode this item is grayed out and you cannot confirm the printer connection status Status Screen Refresh Updates and displays the contents of Printers on the Canon IJ Network Tool screen to the lat...

Страница 314: ...play Warning Automatically Enables or disables automatic display of the instruction screen When this menu is selected the instruction screen is displayed if one or more ports are unavailable for printing 3 Settings menu Configuration Displays the Configuration screen to configure settings of the selected printer Configuration Screen Note This item has the same function as Configuration in the Cano...

Страница 315: ...form settings following the message on the screen If you change the Encryption Method setting and the Password setting on the Set up printer s wireless LAN screen the changed settings are applied to the printer settings Note You can use this function only when you are using a computer compatible with the wireless LAN 4 Help menu Instructions Displays this guide About Displays the version of IJ Net...

Страница 316: ...t the sheet to change the settings The following screen is the example to change the setting on the Wireless LAN sheet Note This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using For details on each sheet see the following Wireless LAN Sheet Wired LAN Sheet Admin Password Sheet 316 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 317: ...point Note When Access point mode is displayed on Network Type you cannot change the settings on the Wireless LAN sheet or the Admin Password sheet You can perform setting from Set up printer s wireless LAN on the Settings menu when you use the printer with the access point mode Depending on the printer you are using you can change the settings using the operation panel 2 SSID The network name SSI...

Страница 318: ... Confirmation screen is displayed automatically To change WPA WPA2 settings set before click Configuration to display the WPA WPA2 Details screen Changing the WPA WPA2 Detailed Settings 5 Configuration The detailed settings screen is displayed The WEP or the WPA WPA2 key selected in Encryption Method can be confirmed and changed For details on WEP setting Changing the WEP Detailed Settings For det...

Страница 319: ...nformation to a third party Note Signal strength is displayed as follows Good Fair Poor Type of encryption is displayed as follows Blank No encryption WEP WEP is set WPA WPA2 WPA WPA2 is set 2 Update Click to update the list of access points when your target access point is not detected If the target access point is set to the stealth mode click Cancel to return to the previous screen and enter th...

Страница 320: ...if the selected access point is encrypted In this case configure the details to use the same encryption settings set to the access point Access points that cannot be used by this machine including those configured to use different encryption methods are displayed grayed out and cannot be configured 320 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 321: ...nd character type that can be entered differ depending on the combination of the key length and key format Key Length 64bit 128bit Key Format ASCII 5 characters 13 characters Hexadecimal Hex 10 digits 26 digits 2 Key Length Select either 64bit or 128bit 3 Key Format Select either ASCII or Hex 4 Key ID Select the Key ID index set to the access point 5 Authentication Select the authentication method...

Страница 322: ... on the present settings 1 Authentication Type Displays the type of authentication used for client authentication This machine supports the PSK authentication method 2 Dynamic Encryption Type Displays the dynamic encryption method 3 Change Settings Displays the Authentication Type Confirmation screen Authentication Type Confirmation Screen 322 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 323: ...sing Type of authentication used for client authentication is displayed 1 Authentication Type Type of authentication used for client authentication is displayed PSK This machine supports the PSK authentication method This authentication type PSK uses a passphrase 323 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 324: ...ess point The passphrase should be a string of 8 to 63 alphanumeric characters or a 64 digit hexadecimal value If you do not know the access point passphrase refer to the instruction manual provided with the access point or contact its manufacturer 2 Dynamic Encryption Type The dynamic encryption method is selected from either TKIP basic encryption or AES secure encryption automatically 324 Downlo...

Страница 325: ...rmation Screen Note This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using Displays the settings used for client authentication Confirm the settings and click Finish 325 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 326: ...o be used over the LAN Specify a value appropriate for your network environment Get IP address automatically Select this option to use an IP address automatically assigned by a DHCP server DHCP server functionality must be enabled on your router Use next IP address Select this option if no DHCP server functionality is available in your setup where you use the printer or you want to use a particula...

Страница 327: ...ord Set an administrator password with privileges to set up and change detailed options To use this feature select this check box and enter a password 2 Password Enter the password to set 3 Password Confirmation Enter the password again for confirmation Important If you forget the administrator password you specified initialize the printer to revert the password to the default setting 327 Download...

Страница 328: ...s and the computers To display the Network Information screen select Network Information from the View menu 1 OK Returns to the Canon IJ Network Tool screen 2 Copy All Information All network information displayed is copied to the clipboard 328 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 329: ...Control Type Select the type of access control with which to limit access of computers or network devices to the printer over a network The setting items may differ depending on the choice of access control methods When Selecting MAC address When Selecting IP address When Selecting MAC address The accessible computers or network devices are specified by their MAC addresses Computers or network dev...

Страница 330: ...dit The Edit Accessible MAC Address screen is displayed to edit the settings selected in Accessible MAC Addresses Edit Accessible MAC Address Screen Add Accessible MAC Address Screen 4 Add The Add Accessible MAC Address screen is displayed to register the MAC address of a computer or a network device from which to access the printer over the network Important Add the MAC address of all computers o...

Страница 331: ... addresses and any comments 3 Edit The Edit Accessible IP Address screen is displayed to edit the settings selected in Accessible IP Addresses Edit Accessible IP Address Screen Add Accessible IP Address Screen 4 Add The Add Accessible IP Address screen is displayed to register the IP address of a computer or a network device from which to access the printer over the network Important Add the IP ad...

Страница 332: ...5 Delete Deletes the selected IP address from the list 332 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 333: ... this section refer to the Add Accessible MAC Address Screen 1 MAC Address Enter the MAC address of a computer or a network device to allow access 2 Comment Optionally enter any information to identify the device such as the name of the computer Important Comments will be displayed only on the computer used to enter them 333 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 334: ...s expressed as four values ranging from 0 to 255 Start IP Address Enter the first IP address in the range of addresses of the computers or network devices to allow access when you selected Range Specification in Specification Method An IP address is expressed as four values ranging from 0 to 255 End IP Address Enter the last IP address in the range of addresses of the computers or network devices ...

Страница 335: ...anon IJ Network Tool Screen Status Screen Connection Performance Measurement Screen Maintenance Screen Network Setup of the Card Slot Screen Associate Port Screen Network Information Screen 335 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 336: ...ter is not displayed Important To change the printer s network settings using IJ Network Tool it must be connected via a LAN If No Driver is displayed for the name associate the port with the printer When the Printer Driver Is Not Associated with a Port If Not Found is displayed for the status check the followings The access point is turned on When using wired LAN the LAN cable is connected proper...

Страница 337: ... IJ Network Tool screen 1 File menu Exit Exits IJ Network Tool 2 View menu Status Displays the Status screen to confirm the printer connection status and wireless communication status In the access point mode this item is grayed out and you cannot confirm the printer connection status Status Screen Refresh Updates and displays the contents of Printers on the Canon IJ Network Tool screen to the lat...

Страница 338: ...play Warning Automatically Enables or disables automatic display of the instruction screen When this menu is selected the instruction screen is displayed if one or more ports are unavailable for printing 3 Settings menu Configuration Displays the Configuration screen to configure settings of the selected printer Configuration Screen Note This item has the same function as Configuration in the Cano...

Страница 339: ...form settings following the message on the screen If you change the Encryption Method setting and the Password setting on the Set up printer s wireless LAN screen the changed settings are applied to the printer settings Note You can use this function only when you are using a computer compatible with the wireless LAN 4 Help menu Instructions Displays this guide About Displays the version of IJ Net...

Страница 340: ...isplayed as Available or Unavailable 2 Signal Strength Indicates the strength of the signal received by the printer ranging from 0 to 100 3 Link Quality Indicates the signal quality excluding the noise while communicating ranging from 0 to 100 4 Advanced Measurement To examine the connection performance between the printer and the access point or between the printer and the computer When you click...

Страница 341: ...easurement Connection Performance Measurement Screen Initial Screen Connection Performance Measurement Screen Completion Screen Connection Performance Measurement Screen Initial Screen Click Next to start measurement Connection Performance Measurement Screen Completion Screen Displays when the measurement is finished 341 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 342: ...ccess point Good connection performance Unstable connection performance Cannot connect Measurement is canceled or cannot measure 2 Remeasurement Measures the connection performance again Note If any messages appear on Overall Network Performance move the machine and access point as instructed to improve the performance 342 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 343: ...not turn off the printer during initialization Click OK when initialization is complete Performing initialization when connected over wireless LAN will break the connection so perform setup with the Setup CD ROM or perform setup according to the instructions on our website 2 Network Setup of the Card Slot Note This item is not available depending on the printer you are using Status displays whethe...

Страница 344: ...nge the network settings of the printer using IJ Network Tool with USB connection after initializing the LAN settings To change the network settings using IJ Network Tool activate the LAN settings in advance Network Setup of the Card Slot Screen Setup Screen 1 Drive Select the drive letter to assign to the network drive 2 Update Reloads the drive letters that are unassigned in Computer My Computer...

Страница 345: ...ry Returns to Network Setup of the Card Slot screen and re executes the network drive mapping 3 Cancel Cancels the card slot setup When IJ Network Tool is running over LAN the Cancel button is displayed grayed out and cannot be clicked 345 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 346: ...th the printer unless the printer driver is associated with the port 1 Model Displays the name of device specified as a destination port It is blank if the name of device is not detected 2 Printer Displays the printer driver installed in the computer Select the printer for which you want to change the association 3 OK Performs association 346 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 347: ...s and the computers To display the Network Information screen select Network Information from the View menu 1 OK Returns to the Canon IJ Network Tool screen 2 Copy All Information All network information displayed is copied to the clipboard 347 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 348: ...for Network Communication Using the Card Slot over a Network When the Printer Driver Is Not Associated with a Port About Technical Terms Restrictions About Firewall 348 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 349: ...d Slot as the Network Drive The card slot must be mounted to use it over a network To mount the card slot as the network drive follow the procedure below 1 Insert a memory card into the card slot of the machine 2 Start up IJ Network Tool 3 Select the machine in Printers 4 Select Maintenance on the Settings menu 5 Click Setup 6 Specify the drive letter then click OK 349 Downloaded from ManualsPrint...

Страница 350: ...nnected computer you cannot access the network drive of the card slot On the other hand when you enable it to be writable only from a LAN connected computer the card slot is not detected via USB Make sure that the card slot setting is selected properly according to your connection method To read files from a memory card via USB and over a network disable the function to write files to a memory car...

Страница 351: ...he procedure below 1 Start up IJ Network Tool 2 Select the printer displayed as No Driver on Name 3 Select Associate Port on the Settings menu The Associate Port screen is displayed 4 Select a printer to associate with a port The list of the printers that the printer driver is installed is displayed at Printer on the Associate Port screen Select a printer to associate with a created port 5 Click O...

Страница 352: ...le You can connect up to 5 devices to the machine using the access point mode Ad hoc Client computer and machine setting where wireless communication occurs on a peer to peer basis i e all clients in with the same SSID network name communicate directly with each other No access point is required This machine does not support ad hoc communication Admin Password Administrator password in IJ Network ...

Страница 353: ...ect the connectable devices on a network automatically C Channel Frequency channel for wireless communication In the infrastructure mode the channel is automatically adjusted to match that set to the access point This machine supports channels 1 to 13 Channels 12 and 13 are not supported depending on the country or region of purchase Note that the number of channels that can be used for your wirel...

Страница 354: ...nnected apparatus At the maximum transfer rate of 600 Mbps it is possible to communicate with multiple computer terminals within a dozen or so metre radius Compatible with 802 11b and 802 11g Infrastructure Client computer and machine setup where all wireless communications pass through an access point IP Address A unique number with four parts separated by dots Every network device that is connec...

Страница 355: ...rectional communication M MAC Address Also known as the physical address A unique and permanent hardware identifier that is assigned to network devices by its manufacturer MAC addresses are 48 bits long and are written as a hexadecimal number separated by colons i e 11 22 33 44 55 66 O Operation Status Indicates the status on whether the printer can be used P Proxy server A server that links a LAN...

Страница 356: ...asting its SSID The client must specify the SSID set to the access point to detect it Subnet Mask IP address has two components the network address and the host address Subnet Mask used to calculate the Subnet Mask address from the IP address A Subnet Mask is usually assigned by an access point or a DHCP server of the router automatically Example IP Address 192 168 127 123 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 ...

Страница 357: ...ore than WEP Authentication WPA defines the following authentication methods PSK that can be used without an authentication server plus WPA 802 1x that do require an authentication server This machine supports WPA PSK Passphrase This encrypted key is used to perform WPA PSK authentication The passphrase should be a string of 8 to 63 alphanumeric characters or a 64 digit hexadecimal value WPA2 Secu...

Страница 358: ...ork There are 2 primary methods used in the Wi Fi Protected Setup PIN entry a mandatory method of setup for all WPS certified devices Push button configuration PBC an actual push button on the hardware or through a simulated push button in the software 358 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 359: ...network key WEP or WPA WPA2 to the access point to encrypt wireless transmission Wireless communication with a product that does not comply with the Wi Fi standard cannot be guaranteed Connecting with too many computers may affect the printer performance such as printing speed 359 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 360: ...oftware or operation system Important If you disabled the firewall function disconnect your network from the Internet Some applications like the network configuration software override firewall settings Check the application s settings beforehand If the printer you use is set to Get IP address automatically the IP address changes every time the printer connects to the network This may disable prin...

Страница 361: ...Successful Printing Be Sure to Check Paper Settings before Printing Be Sure to Set Cassette Paper Information after Loading Paper Canceling a Print Job Key to Enjoying Consistent Printing Quality Precautions for Safe Transport of the Machine 361 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 362: ...performance Canon printer performs cleaning automatically according to its condition When the printer performs cleaning a small amount of ink is consumed In this case all colors of ink may be consumed Cleaning function The cleaning function helps the printer to suck air bubbles or ink itself from the nozzle and thus prevents print quality degradation or nozzle clogging Does black and white printin...

Страница 363: ... area where papers go through may get smeared with ink Clean the inside of your machine with Bottom Plate Cleaning Check how to load the paper correctly Is the paper loaded in the correct orientation To load paper in a cassette load paper WITH THE PRINTING SIDE FACING DOWN Loading Paper A cassette 1 B cassette 2 Is the paper curled The curled paper causes paper jam Flatten the curled paper then re...

Страница 364: ...lity and paper suitable for documents Each media type has specific preset settings how ink is used and sprayed distance from nozzles etc that allow you to print to that type with optimal image quality The wrong paper settings may cause poor printout color quality or scratches on the printed surface If you notice blurring or uneven colors increase the print quality setting and try printing again 36...

Страница 365: ... that detects whether the information set for the paper loaded in the cassette matches the paper settings Before printing make paper settings in accordance with the cassette paper information When this function is enabled an error message is displayed if these settings do not match to prevent incorrect printing When this error message is displayed check and correct the paper settings To check cass...

Страница 366: ...If you press the ON button while printing is in progress the print data sent from the computer queues in the machine and you may not be able to continue to print Press the Stop button to cancel printing 366 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 367: ... be lost Send or print a necessary document or save it on a USB flash drive before unplugging the power cord Print periodically Just as the tip of a felt pen becomes dry and unusable if it has not been used for a long time even if it is capped the print head too may become dried or clogged if the machine has not been used for a long time We recommend you to use the machine at least once a month In...

Страница 368: ... to leak during transport and cause damage to the machine When a shipping agent is handling transport of the machine have its box marked THIS SIDE UP to keep the machine with its bottom facing down Mark also with FRAGILE or HANDLE WITH CARE 1 Turn the machine off 2 Confirm that the POWER lamp is off and unplug the power cord Important Do not unplug the machine while the POWER lamp is lit or flashi...

Страница 369: ... keep them from opening and to prevent the cassettes from falling out during transportation Then pack the machine in the plastic bag 8 Attach the protective material to the machine when packing the machine in the box 369 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 370: ... of deposit Postage stamps canceled or uncanceled Identifying badges or insignias Selective service or draft papers Checks or drafts issued by governmental agencies Motor vehicle licenses and certificates of title Traveler s checks Food stamps Passports Immigration papers Internal revenue stamps canceled or uncanceled Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness Stock certificates Copyrighted works...

Страница 371: ...1 to 95 F 5 to 35 C Humidity 10 to 90 RH no condensation The performance of the printer may be reduced under certain temperature and humidity conditions Recommended conditions Temperature 59 to 86 F 15 to 30 C Humidity 10 to 80 RH no condensation For the temperature and humidity conditions of papers such as photo paper refer to the paper s packaging or the supplied instructions Storage environment...

Страница 372: ... mm Scanning resolution Optical resolution horizontal x vertical max 1200 x 1200 dpi 1 Interpolated resolution max 19200 x 19200 dpi 2 1 Optical Resolution represents the maximum sampling rate based on ISO 14473 2 Increasing the scanning resolution will limit the maximum possible scanning area Gradation Input Output Gray 16 bit 8 bit Color 48 bit 24 bit RGB each 16 bit 8 bit Fax Specifications App...

Страница 373: ...nual redialing max 10 destinations Others Activity report after every 20 transactions Sequential broadcasting max 101 destinations Rejected numbers max 10 destinations Network Specifications Communication protocol TCP IP Wired LAN Supported Standards IEEE802 3u 100BASE TX IEEE802 3 10BASE T Transfer speed 10 M 100 Mbps auto switching Wireless LAN Supported Standards IEEE802 11n IEEE802 11g IEEE802...

Страница 374: ...ported Browser Internet Explorer 8 or later Hard Disk Space 2 5 GB Note For bundled software installation The necessary amount of hard disk space may be changed without notice Display XGA 1024 x 768 Mac OS Operating System Mac OS X v10 6 8 or later Browser Safari 5 or later Hard Disk Space 0 5 GB Note For bundled software installation The necessary amount of hard disk space may be changed without ...

Страница 375: ... Windows NET Framework 4 or 4 5 must be installed to use the Windows software Windows XPS Essentials Pack is required to print on Windows XP Windows The TWAIN driver ScanGear is based on the TWAIN 1 9 Specification and requires the Data Source Manager bundled with the operating system Mac OS Hard Disk must be formatted as Mac OS Extended Journaled or Mac OS Extended Mac OS For Mac OS an internet c...

Страница 376: ...Administrator Settings About the Machine Administration Setting the Administrator Password Restricting the Operation Sharing the Printer on a Network 376 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 377: ...nistrator password is specified or some operations are restricted the screens below are displayed Ex When the screen to enter the administrator password is displayed Ex When all the copying operations are restricted Ex When the message about operation restriction is displayed An administrator password is already specified for the machine at the time of purchase For details About the Administrator ...

Страница 378: ...specify the administrator password 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Flick the HOME screen then tap Setup Using the Operation Panel 3 Tap Device settings 4 Tap Administrator password setting 5 When the confirmation screen to specify the administrator password is displayed tap Yes 6 Check the message then tap OK 7 Tap the range where the administrator password is valid Remote UI Network T...

Страница 379: ...u finished entering the administrator password 11 Tap Apply The administrator password is enabled When You Want to Change or Disable the Administrator Password When the administrator password is enabled tapping Setup Device settings and Administrator password setting in this order and entering the administrator password displays Change administrator password and Remove administrator password on th...

Страница 380: ... copying you can restrict color copying operations only Print from storage medium Restricts to print from a USB flash drive Scan to USB flash drive Restricts to save the scanned data on a USB flash drive Scan to destination folder Restricts to forward the scanned data to a shared folder on the computer FAX transmission Restricts to send a fax Note Sending a fax from a computer is not restricted ev...

Страница 381: ... Note If you disable all restrictions tap Cancel operation restrictions in step 5 When the confirmation screen is displayed tap Yes To disable each operation restriction tap the item in step 6 then tap Do not restrict 381 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 382: ...printer Setting Up a Shared Printer This section describes how to set up the print server and the client Note The Windows versions of the computers connected to the network do not necessarily have to be the same To set up the fax driver use the same procedure Related Topic Restrictions on Printer Sharing 382 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 383: ...s and Faxes window is displayed 3 Click the icon for the model name of printer to be shared If you are using Windows 8 1 Windows 8 Windows 7 Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows Server 2012 or Windows Server 2008 R2 press the Alt key and from the displayed File menu select Printer properties Sharing tab If you are using Windows Vista press the Alt key and from the displayed File menu select Run as admin...

Страница 384: ...ver 2003 from the File menu open Server Properties and select the Drivers tab 3 Click Add 4 When the Add Printer Driver Wizard window is displayed click Next 5 If the print server has a 32 bit architecture select x64 If the print server has a 64 bit architecture select x86 Then click Next 6 Click Have Disk 7 In the Install From Disk window open the Driver folder of the downloaded printer driver sp...

Страница 385: ...he message display follow the procedure below If you are using Windows 8 1 Windows 8 Windows Server 2012 R2 or Windows Server 2012 In the Devices and Printers window of the client system select the printer from Printers and click Print server properties on the command bar Uncheck Show informational notifications for network printers on the Advanced tab and then restart the computer If you are usin...

Страница 386: ...ew When the functions on the Maintenance tab cannot be set properly from a client system they may be grayed out In this case change the settings from the print server When you change the settings of the print server you should delete the icon of the shared printer from the client system and then specify the shared settings again in the client system If the same driver installed on the print server...

Страница 387: ...ilable depending on the printer you are using operation panel of the printer IJ Network Tool printer information screen displayed on some Canon application software When you change the password use 0 to 32 alphanumeric characters If the password has been changed while you are sharing the printer and you do not know the password ask the administrator of the printer you are using The password revert...

Страница 388: ...Printing Printing from a Computer Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Paper setting for Printing 388 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 389: ...Printing from a Computer Printing with Application Software that You are Using Printer Driver 389 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 390: ...g Printer Driver Printing with Easy Setup Basic Various Printing Methods Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Overview of the Printer Driver Printer Driver Description Updating the MP Drivers 390 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 391: ...iver setup window 4 Select a frequently used profile In Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab select a printing profile suited for the purpose When you select a printing profile the Additional Features Media Type and Printer Paper Size settings are automatically switched to the values that were preset 5 Select the print quality For Print Quality select High or Standard according to your pu...

Страница 392: ...ile 6 Select the paper source Select Cassette Auto Select Cassette 1 or Cassette 2 that matches your purpose for Paper Source Important The paper source settings that can be selected may differ depending on the paper type and size 7 Complete the setup 392 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 393: ... window click Save to register the specified settings Note If the paper settings on the printer driver differ from the cassette paper information registered on the printer an error may occur For instructions on what to do if an error occurs see Paper setting for Printing For details about the cassette paper information to be registered on the printer see the following Paper Settings on the Printer...

Страница 394: ...inting Media name Model No Media Type in the printer driver Cassette paper information registered on the printer Photo Paper Plus Glossy II PP 201 Photo Paper Plus Glossy II Plus Glossy II Photo Paper Pro Luster LU 101 Photo Paper Pro Luster Pro Luster Photo Paper Plus Semi gloss SG 201 Photo Paper Plus Semi gloss Plus Semi gloss Photo Paper Glossy GP 501 GP 601 Glossy Photo Paper Glossy Matte Pho...

Страница 395: ...e in the printer driver Cassette paper information registered on the printer Letter 8 5 x11 22x28cm Letter Legal 8 5 x14 22x36cm Legal A5 A5 A4 A4 B5 B5 4 x6 10x15cm KG 4 x6 10x15 5 x7 13x18cm 2L 5 x7 13x18 8 x10 20x25cm 8 x10 20x25cm L 89x127mm L 89x127mm 2L 127x178mm 2L 5 x7 13x18 Envelope Com 10 Envelope Com 10 Envelope DL Envelope DL Yougata 4 4 13 x9 25 Others Yougata 6 3 86 x7 48 Others Cust...

Страница 396: ...Booklet Printing Duplex Printing Stamp Background Printing Registering a Stamp Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Setting Up Envelope Printing Printing on Postcards Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose Displaying the Print Results before Printing Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History 396 Downloaded from Manual...

Страница 397: ...tup window 2 Select the paper size Select a page size from the Page Size list on the Page Setup tab 3 Set Orientation Select Portrait or Landscape for Orientation Check Rotate 180 degrees check box when you want to perform printing with the original being rotated 180 degrees 4 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document will be printed with the selected page size and the orient...

Страница 398: ...ted 3 Specify the print order Check the Print from Last Page check box when you want to print from the last page in order and uncheck the check box when you want to print from the first page Check the Collate check box when you are printing multiple copies of a document and want to print out all pages in each copy together Uncheck this check box when you want to print all pages with the same page ...

Страница 399: ...ter driver the number of copies may be multiplied numbers of the two settings or the specified printing order may not be enabled Print from Last Page appears grayed out and is unavailable when Tiling Poster is selected for Page Layout When Booklet is selected for Page Layout Print from Last Page and Collate appear grayed out and cannot be set When Duplex Printing is selected Print from Last Page a...

Страница 400: ...position of the stapling margin from Stapling Side on the Page Setup tab The printer analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings and automatically selects the best staple position When you want to change the setting select from the list 3 Set the margin width If necessary click Specify Margin and set the margin width and then click OK 400 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 401: ...int the data is printed with the specified staple side and margin width Important Stapling Side and Specify Margin appear grayed out and are unavailable when Tiling Poster or Booklet is selected for Page Layout Scaled is selected for Page Layout When Duplex Printing is also selected only Stapling Side can be specified 401 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 402: ...nt Using Page Size select the page size that is set with your application software 4 Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the printer from the Printer Paper Size list When the Printer Paper Size is smaller than the Page Size the page image will be reduced When the Printer Paper Size is larger than the Page Size the page image will be enlarged The current settings are ...

Страница 403: ...5 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document will be enlarged or reduced to fit to the page size 403 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 404: ...ect the paper size of the document Using Page Size select the page size that is set with your application software 4 Set the scaling rate by using one of the following methods Select a Printer Paper Size When the printer paper size is smaller than the Page Size the page image will be reduced When the printer paper size is larger than the Page Size the page image will be enlarged 404 Downloaded fro...

Страница 405: ...lete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document will be printed with the specified scale Important When the application software which you used to create the original has the scaled printing function configure the settings on your application software You do not need to configure the same setting in the printer driver 405 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 406: ...Note Selecting Scaled changes the printable area of the document 406 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 407: ...the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver 3 Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the printer from the Printer Paper Size list 4 Set the number of pages to be printed on one sheet and the page order If necessary click Specify specify the following settings in the Page Lay...

Страница 408: ...rangement order select a placement method from the list Page Border To print a page border around each document page check this check box 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the specified number of pages will be arranged on each sheet of paper in the specified order 408 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 409: ... as follows Setting Tiling Poster Printing 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set tiling poster printing Select Tiling Poster from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver 3 Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the printer from the Printer Paper Size list 4 Set th...

Страница 410: ... range Select All under normal circumstances To reprint only a specific page select Pages and enter the page number you want to print To specify multiple pages enter the page numbers by separating them with commas or by entering a hyphen between the page numbers Note You can also specify the print range by clicking the pages in the settings preview 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup t...

Страница 411: ...es or Delete all pages 2 Complete the setup After completing the page selection click OK When you execute print only specified pages will be printed Important Since tiling poster printing enlarges the document when printing it the print results may become coarse 411 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 412: ...lows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set booklet printing Select Booklet from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the window 3 Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the printer from the Printer Paper Size list 4 Set the margin for stapling and the margin width Click Specify a...

Страница 413: ...check the check box 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the document is automatically printed first on one side of a sheet of paper and then on the opposite side When the printing is complete fold the paper at the center of the margin and make a booklet Important Booklet cannot be selected when a media type other than Plain Paper is selected for Media Type on...

Страница 414: ...ow 2 Set automatic duplex printing Check the Duplex Printing check box on the Page Setup tab and confirm that Automatic is checked 3 Select the layout Select Normal size Fit to Page Scaled or Page Layout from the Page Layout list 4 Set the print area When you perform duplex printing the print area of the document becomes slightly narrower than usual and the document may not fit on one page Click P...

Страница 415: ...om the list 6 Set the margin width If necessary click Specify Margin and set the margin width and then click OK 7 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print duplex printing will be started Performing Duplex Printing Manually You can perform the duplex printing manually 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set duplex printing Check the Duplex Printing check box and...

Страница 416: ...hen click Start Printing to print the opposite side Important When a media type other than Plain Paper is selected from the Media Type list on the Main tab Duplex Printing appears grayed out and is unavailable When Borderless Tiling Poster or Booklet is selected from the Page Layout list Duplex Printing and Stapling Side appear grayed out and are unavailable Duplex Printing can be performed only w...

Страница 417: ...Related Topic Changing the Printer Operation Mode 417 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 418: ...illustration behind the document data The procedure for performing stamp background printing is as follows Printing a Stamp CONFIDENTIAL IMPORTANT and other stamps that are used often in companies are pre registered 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Stamp Background Stamp on the Page Setup tab The Stamp Background Stamp dialog box opens Note With the XPS printer driver the Stamp Backg...

Страница 419: ...er is used When the XPS printer driver is used the stamp is normally printed in the foreground of the document Print semitransparent stamp Check this check box to print a semi transparent stamp on the document This function is available only when the XPS printer driver is used Stamp first page only To print the stamp only on the first page check this check box 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the ...

Страница 420: ...s check box 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified background Note The stamp and background are not printed on blank sheets inserted with the Insert blank page function of booklet printing Related Topics Registering a Stamp Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background 420 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 421: ...eted at any time The procedure for registering a new stamp is as follows Registering a New Stamp 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Stamp Background Stamp on the Page Setup tab The Stamp Background Stamp dialog box opens Note With the XPS printer driver the Stamp Background button has become the Stamp button and only the stamp function can be used 3 Click Define Stamp The Stamp Setting...

Страница 422: ...and Outline You can select the color of the stamp by clicking Select Color Important Stamp Text appears grayed out and is unavailable when Date Time User Name is selected Placement tab Select the stamp position from the Position list You can also select Custom from the Position list and specify coordinates for X Position and Y Position You can also change the stamp position by dragging the stamp i...

Страница 423: ... settings tab When you want to save the stamp with a different title type a new title in the Title box and click Save Click OK when the confirmation message appears 5 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background Stamp dialog box opens again The registered title appears in the Stamp list Deleting an Unnecessary Stamp 1 Click Define Stamp in the Stamp Background Stamp dialog box The Stamp Settin...

Страница 424: ...necessary background can be deleted The procedure for registering image data to be used as a background is as follows Registering New Background 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Stamp Background on the Page Setup tab The Stamp Background dialog box opens Note With the XPS printer driver the Stamp Background button has become the Stamp button and Background cannot be used 3 Click Sele...

Страница 425: ...ens the background To print the background at the original bitmap intensity move the slider to the rightmost position 6 Save the background Click the Save settings tab and enter a title in the Title box and then click Save Click OK when the confirmation message appears Note Spaces tabs and returns cannot be entered at the beginning or end of a title 7 Complete the setup Click OK then it returns to...

Страница 426: ... then it returns to Stamp Background dialog box The registered title appears in the Background list Deleting an Unnecessary Background 1 Click Select Background in the Stamp Background dialog box The Background Settings dialog box opens 2 Select the background to be deleted Select the title of the background you want to delete from the Backgrounds list on the Save settings tab and then click Delet...

Страница 427: ...en the Envelope Size Setting dialog box is displayed select Envelope Com 10 Envelope DL Yougata 4 4 13 x9 25 or Yougata 6 3 86 x7 48 and then click OK 5 Set the orientation To print the addressee horizontally select Landscape for Orientation 6 Select the print quality Select High or Standard that matches your purpose for Print Quality 7 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the inform...

Страница 428: ...of the Option menu to enable the setting Note If the paper settings on the printer driver differ from the cassette paper information registered on the printer an error may occur For instructions on what to do if an error occurs see Paper setting for Printing For details about the cassette paper information to be registered on the printer see the following Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and t...

Страница 429: ...paper information to be registered on the printer see the following Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer Media Type Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer Paper Size 5 Select the paper size For Printer Paper Size select Hagaki 100x148mm or Hagaki 2 200x148mm Important Return postcards can be used only when you print them from the computer When printing a return postca...

Страница 430: ...played To display guide messages again open the Maintenance tab and click View Printer Status to start the Canon IJ Status Monitor On the Option menu choose Display Guide Message and click Hagaki Printing to enable the setting When printing on media other than postcards load the media according to usage method of that media and click Start Printing 430 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 431: ...urce list select the paper source that matches your purpose Cassette Auto Select Based on the paper settings on the printer driver and the cassette paper information registered on the printer the printer automatically determines which cassette to use and feeds paper from that cassette Cassette 1 Paper is fed from the cassette 1 Cassette 2 Paper is fed from the cassette 2 Important When a media typ...

Страница 432: ...tion registered on the printer an error may occur For instructions on what to do if an error occurs see Paper setting for Printing For details about the cassette paper information to be registered on the printer see the following Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer Media Type Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer Paper Size 432 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Man...

Страница 433: ...ick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set the preview Check the Preview before printing check box on the Main tab 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the Canon IJ Preview opens and displays the print results Important In the Manual Color Adjustment dialog box the Color Adjustment tab contains the Print a pattern for color adjustment check box When this check box i...

Страница 434: ...ter Paper Size on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the paper size Select Custom for Page Size on the Page Setup tab The Custom Paper Size dialog box opens 3 Set the custom paper size Specify Units and enter the Width and Height of the paper to be used Then click OK 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the data is printed with...

Страница 435: ...d user defined media For information about printable sizes for user defined media see Media Types You Can Use Note If the paper settings on the printer driver differ from the cassette paper information registered on the printer an error may occur For instructions on what to do if an error occurs see Paper setting for Printing For details about the cassette paper information to be registered on the...

Страница 436: ...t history to print the document The procedure for using the Canon IJ XPS Preview is as follows Print Combine Documents Delete Document Reset Documents View Thumbnails Move Document Undo Move Page Delete Page Note By clicking View Thumbnails you can display or hide thumbnails of the print documents selected in the Document Name list Clicking Undo reverses the change that just performed 436 Download...

Страница 437: ...fore the combining are deleted from the list and the combined document is added to the list Changing the sequence of print documents or print pages To change the sequence of the print documents go to the Document Name list and select the print document to be moved Next on the Edit menu select Move Document from Documents and select the appropriate item You can also click and drag a print document ...

Страница 438: ...nt some functions may not be available in the Canon IJ XPS preview Note You can rename Document Name to any name 5 Executing print Click Print When you execute print the printer uses the specified settings to print the data Reprinting from the Print History When you click Save Print History on the File menu to enable the setting the document printed from the preview is saved and you can reprint th...

Страница 439: ...ng of Image Data Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Printing with ICC Profiles Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns Printer Driver Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Adjusting Intensity Contrast Using Sample Patterns Printer Driver 439 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 440: ...omplete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document is converted to grayscale data It allows you to print the color document in monochrome Important When the Grayscale Printing check box is checked the printer driver processes image data as sRGB data In this case actual colors printed may differ from those in the original image data When using the grayscale printing function to print Ad...

Страница 441: ...Note During Grayscale Printing inks other than black ink may be used as well 441 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 442: ...n software to specify a printing ICC profile select None The procedure for specifying color correction is as follows You can also set color correction on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab ...

Страница 443: ...re to print data 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the document data is printed with the specified color correction Important When ICM is disabled in the application software ICM is unavailable for Color Correction and the printer may not be able to print the image data properly When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked Color Correction app...

Страница 444: ...ftware to be used There are two typical printing methods Check the color space Adobe RGB or sRGB of the image data and the application software to be used and then select the printing method suited to your purpose Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Describes the procedure for printing sRGB data by using the color correction function of the printer driver To print using Canon Digital Photo Co...

Страница 445: ... driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Select color correction Click Matching tab and select Driver Matching for Color Correction 4 Set the other items If necessary click Color Adjustment tab and adjust the color balance Cyan Magenta Yellow and adjust Brightness Intensi...

Страница 446: ...Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast 446 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 447: ...ftware to select color management items and specify an input ICC profile and a printing ICC profile in the image data Even if you print using a printing ICC profile that you created yourself from your application software be sure to select color management items from your application software For instructions refer to the manual of the application software you are using 1 Open the printer driver s...

Страница 448: ...e Adobe RGB color space even if the application software does not support Adobe RGB 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Select color correction Click Matching tab and select ICM ICC Profile Matching for Color Correction 4 Select the input profile Se...

Страница 449: ...other items If necessary click Color Adjustment tab and adjust Cyan Magenta Yellow Brightness Intensity and Contrast settings and then click OK 6 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the printer uses the color space of the image data Related Topics Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast 449 Downl...

Страница 450: ...lance is used to intensify cyan and to diminish yellow so that the overall colors are more uniform No adjustment Adjust color balance The procedure for adjusting color balance is as follows You can also set color balance on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer dri...

Страница 451: ...ew on the left side of the printer driver After adjusting each color click OK 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the document is printed with the adjusted color balance Important When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked the color balance Cyan Magenta Yellow appear grayed out and are unavailable Related Topics Specifying Color Correction Adj...

Страница 452: ...he adjustment values Described below is the procedure for adjusting the color balance while looking at the pattern 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Selecting pattern print On the Color Adjustment tab select the Print a pattern for color adjustmen...

Страница 453: ... Select the paper size to be used for pattern printing Note Depending on the paper size selected on the Page Setup tab there may be sizes that cannot be selected Amount of Pattern Instances Select Largest Large or Small to set the number of patterns to be printed Note Largest and Large cannot be selected when certain paper sizes or output paper sizes are selected Color Variation Between Instances ...

Страница 454: ...ute printing The printer then prints a pattern in which the color balance that you set is the center value 6 Adjusting the color balance Look at the print results and select the image that you like best Then enter the color balance numbers indicated at the bottom of that image into the Cyan Magenta and Yellow fields on the Color Adjustment tab Clear the Print a pattern for color adjustment check b...

Страница 455: ...ems are grayed out and cannot be set Preview before printing on the Main tab Stapling Side and Specify Margin on the Page Setup tab When Duplex Printing is set only Stapling Side can be set You can print a pattern only if Normal size is selected for Page Layout on the Page Setup tab When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked Cyan Magenta and Yellow appear grayed out and are u...

Страница 456: ... You can also set brightness on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Specify the brightness Sele...

Страница 457: ...he Main tab When you execute print the data is printed at the specified brightness Related Topics Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast 457 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 458: ...ntensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Adjust intensity Moving the Intensity slider to the right intensifies darkens the colors and moving the slider to the left dilutes brightens the colors You can ...

Страница 459: ...he adjusted intensity Related Topics Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns Printer Driver Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Contrast Adjusting Intensity Contrast Using Sample Patterns Printer Driver 459 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 460: ...ing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Adjust the contrast Moving the Contrast slider to the right increases the contrast and moving the slid...

Страница 461: ...s printed with the adjusted contrast Related Topics Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns Printer Driver Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Intensity Contrast Using Sample Patterns Printer Driver 461 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 462: ...h the adjustment values Described below is the procedure for adjusting the intensity contrast while looking at the pattern 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Selecting pattern print On the Color Adjustment tab select the Print a pattern for color a...

Страница 463: ...zes that cannot be selected Amount of Pattern Instances Select Largest Large or Small to set the number of patterns to be printed Note Largest and Large cannot be selected when certain paper sizes or output paper sizes are selected Color Variation Between Instances Set the amount of color change between neighboring patterns Note Large is about double the size of Medium and Small is about half the ...

Страница 464: ...ast that you set is the center value 6 Adjusting the intensity contrast Look at the print results and select the image that you like best Then enter the intensity contrast numbers indicated at the bottom of that image into the Intensity and Contrast fields on the Color Adjustment tab Clear the Print a pattern for color adjustment check box and click OK 464 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manual...

Страница 465: ...lor adjustment is selected on the Color Adjustment tab the following items are grayed out and cannot be set Preview before printing on the Main tab Stapling Side and Specify Margin on the Page Setup tab When Duplex Printing is set only Stapling Side can be set You can print a pattern only if Normal size is selected for Page Layout on the Page Setup tab Depending on your application software this f...

Страница 466: ...Driver How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Canon IJ Status Monitor Checking the Ink Status from Your Computer Canon IJ Preview Deleting the Undesired Print Job Instructions for Use Printer Driver 466 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 467: ... standard printer driver must already be installed on your computer Installing the Printer Driver To install the regular printer driver load the Setup CD ROM that comes with the printer and then install the driver from Start Setup Again To install the XPS printer driver load the Setup CD ROM that comes with the printer and then select XPS Driver from Add Software Specifying the Printer Driver To s...

Страница 468: ...figure a printing profile that is common to all application software 1 Select as described below If you are using Windows 8 1 or Windows 8 from the Desktop charms select Settings Control Panel Hardware and Sound Devices and Printers If you are using Windows 7 select the Start menu Devices and Printers If you are using Windows Vista select the Start menu Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers If...

Страница 469: ...ton of the status monitor displayed on the task bar The Canon IJ Status Monitor appears Note To open the Canon IJ Status Monitor when the printer is not printing open the printer driver setup window and click View Printer Status on the Maintenance tab The information displayed on the Canon IJ Status Monitor may differ depending on the country or region where you are using your printer When Errors ...

Страница 470: ...he Canon IJ Status Monitor may differ depending on the country or region where you are using your printer 3 If necessary click Ink Details You can check the ink related information If a warning or error related to the remaining ink amount occurs a notification icon is displayed at the top of the image in the Ink Details dialog box In such cases take the appropriate action as described on the scree...

Страница 471: ...n also change the media type and paper source settings When you want to display a preview before printing open the printer driver setup window click the Main tab and check the Preview before printing check box When you do not want to display a preview before printing uncheck the check box Important If you are using the XPS printer driver see Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print ...

Страница 472: ...sk bar The Canon IJ Status Monitor appears 2 Display the print jobs Click Display Print Queue The print queue window opens 3 Delete the print jobs Select Cancel All Documents from the Printer menu When the confirmation message appears click Yes The deletion of the print job is complete Important Users who have not been granted access permission for printer management cannot delete the print job of...

Страница 473: ...ab Prevention of Print Data Loss in the Print Options dialog box on the Page Setup tab Page Layout Tiling Poster Booklet Duplex Printing Specify Margin Print from Last Page Collate and Stamp Background Stamp on the Page Setup tab Print a pattern for color adjustment on the Color Adjustment tab in the Manual Color Adjustment dialog box Since the resolution in the preview display differs from the pr...

Страница 474: ...cified in Word 3 Set the Page Layout that you want and then click OK to close the window 4 Without starting printing close the Print dialog box 5 Open Word s Print dialog box again 6 Open the printer driver setup window and click OK 7 Start printing If bitmap printing is enabled in Adobe Illustrator Adobe Systems Incorporated printing may take time or some data may not be printed Print after unche...

Страница 475: ...p tab Description Main tab Description Page Setup tab Description Maintenance tab Description Canon IJ Preview Description Canon IJ XPS Preview Description Canon IJ Status Monitor Description 475 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 476: ...iles or by holding down the Ctrl key and pressing the up or down arrow keys Standard These are the factory settings If Page Size Orientation and Copies were set from the application software those settings have priority Business Document Select this setting when printing a general document If Page Size Orientation and Copies were set from the application software those settings have priority Paper...

Страница 477: ...k an overall image of the layout Preview before printing Shows what the print result will look like before you actually print the data Check this check box to display a preview before printing Uncheck this check box if you do not want to display a preview Important To use the Canon IJ XPS Preview you must have Microsoft NET Framework 4 Client Profile installed on your computer Additional Features ...

Страница 478: ...ally loaded into the printer Normally the paper size is set automatically according to the output paper size setting and the document is printed with no scaling When you set 2 on 1 Printing or 4 on 1 Printing in Additional Features you can manually set the paper size with Page Size on the Page Setup tab If you select a paper size that is smaller than the Page Size the document size will be reduced...

Страница 479: ...However if the print results are not acceptable specify the function settings on the application software Always Print with Current Settings Prints documents with the current settings starting from the next print execution When you select this function and then close the printer driver setup window the information that you set on the Quick Setup Main and Page Setup tabs are saved and printing with...

Страница 480: ... application software Save the orientation setting Saves the Orientation to the printing profile in Commonly Used Settings To apply the saved print orientation when the printing profile is selected check this check box If this check box is unchecked the print orientation is not saved and consequently the Orientation setting is not applied when the printing profile is selected Instead the printer p...

Страница 481: ...ing the Print Results before Printing Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns Printer Driver Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Adjusting Intensity Contrast Using Sample Patterns Printer Driver Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile...

Страница 482: ...at is loaded in the printer This ensures that printing is carried out properly for the specified paper Paper Source Shows the source from which paper is supplied You may be able to switch the paper source with the printer driver Cassette Auto Select Based on the paper settings on the printer driver and the cassette paper information registered on the printer the printer automatically determines wh...

Страница 483: ...djust colors use the Manual Color Adjustment dialog box to set the profile Grayscale Printing This function converts the data to monochrome data when printing your document Check this check box to print a color document in monochrome Preview before printing Shows what the print result will look like before you actually print the data Check this check box to display a preview before printing Import...

Страница 484: ...ortant When Grayscale Printing is checked on the Main tab Cyan Magenta and Yellow appear grayed out and are unavailable Brightness Selects the brightness of your print You cannot change the levels of pure white and black However the brightness of the colors between white and black can be changed Intensity Adjusts the overall intensity of your print Moving the slider to the right increases the inte...

Страница 485: ... be sizes that cannot be selected Amount of Pattern Instances Sets the number of patterns to be printed You can select from Largest Large and Small When you select a pattern size the number of patterns that can be printed is as follows Note Largest and Large cannot be selected when certain paper sizes or output paper sizes are selected The setting preview on the Main tab displays an image that all...

Страница 486: ...e able to print the image data properly None Disables color adjustment with the printer driver Input Profile Specifies the input profile to be used when you select ICM ICC Profile Matching for Color Correction Standard The standard printer profile sRGB which supports the color space of ICM is used This is the default setting Adobe RGB 1998 The Adobe RGB profile which supports a wider color space t...

Страница 487: ...Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Displaying the Print Results before Printing 487 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 488: ...tion If you select Custom the Custom Paper Size dialog box opens and allows you to specify any vertical and horizontal dimensions for the paper size Orientation Selects the printing orientation If the application used to create your document has a similar function select the same orientation that you selected in that application Portrait Prints the document so that its top and bottom positions are...

Страница 489: ...eck this check box to reduce the size when printing the document Fit to Page This function enables you to automatically enlarge or reduce documents to fit to the paper size loaded in the printer without changing the paper size you specified in your application software Scaled Documents can be enlarged or reduced to be printed Specify the size in Printer Paper Size or enter the scaling ratio in the...

Страница 490: ...print You can specify a value from 1 to 999 Important If the application used to create your document has a similar function specify the number of copies with the application without specifying it here Print from Last Page Check this check box when you want to print from the last page in order If you do this you do not need to sort the pages into their correct order after printing Uncheck this che...

Страница 491: ...e placed on one sheet of paper the page order and whether a page border line is to be printed around each document page The settings specified in this dialog box can be confirmed in the settings preview on the printer driver Preview Icon Shows the settings made on the Page Layout Printing dialog box You can check what the print result will look like before you actually print the data Pages Specifi...

Страница 492: ... the pages that do not need to be printed by clicking them in the settings preview of the Page Setup tab Only the pages shown on the screen will be printed this time Booklet Printing dialog box This dialog box allows you to set how to bind the document as a booklet Printing only on one side and printing a page border can also be set in this dialog box The settings specified in this dialog box can ...

Страница 493: ...ges to print data that is sent to the printer Depending on the type of printer driver you are using and the environment this function may not be available Disable ICM required from the application software Disables the ICM function required from the application software When an application software uses Windows ICM to print data unexpected colors may be produced or the printing speed may decrease ...

Страница 494: ...x Do not allow application software to compress print data Compression of the application software print data is prohibited If the print result has missing image data or unintended colors selecting this check box may improve the condition Important Uncheck this check box under normal circumstances Note Do not allow application software to compress print data tab cannot be used with the XPS printer...

Страница 495: ...d Stamp dialog box The Stamp Background Stamp dialog box allows you to print a stamp and or background over or behind the document pages In addition to the pre registered ones you can register and use your original stamp or background Note With the XPS printer driver the Stamp Background button has become the Stamp button and only the stamp function can be used Stamp Stamp printing is a function t...

Страница 496: ...change layout method and intensity of the selected background Background first page only Selects whether to print the background on the first page only or print on all pages when the document has two or more pages Check the Background check box to enable this Check this check box to print a background on the first page only Stamp Tab The Stamp tab allows you to set the text and bitmap file bmp to ...

Страница 497: ... the slider to the right increases the size moving the slider to the left decreases the size Transparent white area Specifies whether to make white filled areas of the bitmap transparent Check this check box to make white filled areas of the bitmap transparent Note Click Defaults to set Stamp Type to text Stamp Text to blank TrueType Font to Arial Style to Regular Size to 36 points Outline uncheck...

Страница 498: ...e Stamps list and click this button Background Tab The Background tab allows you to select a bitmap file bmp to be used as a background or determine how to print the selected background Preview Window Shows the status of the bitmap set on the Background tab File Specifies the name of the bitmap file to be used as the background Select File Opens the dialog box to open a file Click this button to s...

Страница 499: ... the background image you specified Up to 64 characters can be entered Note Spaces tabs and returns cannot be entered at the beginning or end of a title Backgrounds Shows a list of registered background titles Specify a title to display the corresponding background in Title Save Save overwrite Saves the image data as a background After inserting the Title click this button Delete Deletes an unnece...

Страница 500: ... the print head problem Note Deep Cleaning consumes a larger amount of ink than Cleaning Cleaning the print heads frequently will rapidly deplete your printer s ink supply Therefore perform cleaning only when necessary Ink Group When you click Cleaning or Deep Cleaning the Ink Group window is displayed Selects the ink group that you want to clean the print head for Click Initial Check Items to dis...

Страница 501: ... the Maintenance tab Cleaning Performs print head cleaning Print head cleaning removes any blockage in the print head nozzles Perform cleaning when printing becomes faint or if a specific color fails to print even though all ink levels are sufficiently high Power Off Turns off the printer from the printer driver Perform this function to turn off the printer when you cannot press the ON button POWE...

Страница 502: ... version of the printer driver plus a copyright notice can be checked In addition the language to be used can be switched Initial Check Items Before running Cleaning or Deep Cleaning check that the printer power is on and open the cover of the printer Check the following items for each ink Check the amount of ink remaining in the tank Make sure that you push in the ink tank completely until you he...

Страница 503: ...wer is on and open the cover of the printer Check the following items for each ink Check the amount of ink remaining in the tank Make sure that you push in the ink tank completely until you hear a clicking sound If an orange tape is adhered to the ink tank peel it off completely Any remaining tape will hinder ink output Check that the ink tanks are installed in their correct positions Quiet Settin...

Страница 504: ...rection of the Landscape in the Orientation To rotate the document 90 degrees to the left when printing select the check box Don t detect mismatch of paper settings when printing from computer When you print documents from your computer and the paper settings on the printer driver and the cassette paper information registered on the printer do not match this setting disables the message display an...

Страница 505: ...will be garbled Related Topics Cleaning the Print Heads from Your Computer Aligning the Print Head Position from Your Computer Use Your Computer to Print a Nozzle Check Pattern Managing the Printer Power Reducing the Printer Noise Changing the Printer Operation Mode 505 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 506: ...e preview screen This command has the same function as the Start Printing on the toolbar Cancel Printing Ends the Canon IJ Preview and cancels the printing of the document that is displayed on the preview screen This command has the same function as the Cancel Printing on the toolbar Exit Ends the Canon IJ Preview Page Menu This menu includes the following commands to select page to be displayed A...

Страница 507: ...d allows you to specify the page number of the page to be displayed Zoom Menu Selects the ratio of the actual size printed on the paper to the preview display size You can also select the ratio from the drop down list box located on the toolbar Whole Displays the entire page of data as one page 50 Reduces the displayed data to 50 of the actual size to be printed 100 Displays the data at the actual...

Страница 508: ...for each page at the left side of the preview screen This screen also allows you to change the media type and paper source settings Important If the media type and paper source are set from the application software those settings have priority and the changed settings may become ineffective Printer Paper Size Displays the paper size of the document to be printed Media Type You can select the media...

Страница 509: ...on IJ XPS Preview you must have Microsoft NET Framework 4 Client Profile installed on your computer File Menu Selects print operation and print history settings Print Prints the documents selected in the document list The printed documents are deleted from the list and when all documents are printed the Canon IJ XPS Preview closes This command has the same function as Print on the toolbar and the ...

Страница 510: ...t Documents Returns the document selected in the document list to their status before they were added to the Canon IJ XPS Preview The combined documents are separated and the original documents are restored This command has the same function as the Reset Documents on the toolbar Move Document Use the following command to change the order of the documents selected in the document list Move to First...

Страница 511: ...he currently selected page If page layout printing is set the pages enclosed with red frame will be deleted This command has the same function as the Delete Page on the toolbar Restore Page Restores pages that were deleted with the Delete Page function To restore pages you must select the View Deleted Pages check box on the Option menu and display the deleted pages as thumbnails Move Page Use the ...

Страница 512: ...If the currently selected document is the last document this command is grayed out and cannot be selected Pages Use the following command to select the page to be displayed Note If the Page Layout setting in the printer driver is specified to Tiling Poster or Booklet the number of pages is the number of sheets to be used for printing and not the number of pages in the original document created wit...

Страница 513: ... the View Thumbnails on the toolbar View Document List Displays the print document list at the top of the preview window View Print Settings Area Displays the print settings area at the right side of the preview window View Deleted Pages When the thumbnails are displayed this function displays pages that were deleted with the Delete Page function To check deleted pages you must first select the Vi...

Страница 514: ...elected print document one up from its current position If the currently selected document is the first document this command is grayed out and cannot be selected Move Down One Moves the selected print document one down from its current position If the currently selected document is the last document this command is grayed out and cannot be selected Move to Last Moves the selected print document t...

Страница 515: ...ws you to select the paper source of the document to be printed Page Layout Displays the page layout of the document to be printed Layout tab You can specify settings for page layout printing To apply the specified settings click Apply If the page layout print settings cannot be changed for the print document the individual items are grayed out and cannot be selected Manual Color Adjustment tab Th...

Страница 516: ...button restores all the settings on this tab to their default values factory settings Grayscale Printing Allows you to change the monochrome print settings Duplex Printing Selects whether to print the document on both sides or one side of a sheet of paper If the duplex print settings cannot be changed for the print document this item is grayed out and is unavailable Important When you select Bookl...

Страница 517: ...he status of the printer and ink with graphics and messages You can check the information on the printing document and the printing progress during printing When a printer error occurs it shows the cause and solution Follow the instruction in the message Printer Canon IJ Status Monitor shows an icon when a warning or error occurs to the printer Indicates that a warning operator call error has occu...

Страница 518: ...the Option menu and enable this setting Hagaki Printing Displays the guide message before the printer begins hagaki printing To hide this guide message select the Do not show this message again check box To display the guide messages again click Hagaki Printing on the Display Guide Message in the Option menu and enable this setting Display Warning Automatically When a Low Ink Warning Occurs Starts...

Страница 519: ...hows the ink tank types for your printer Close Closes the Ink Details dialog box to return to Canon IJ Status Monitor Help Menu When you select this menu item the Help window for Canon IJ Status Monitor is displayed and you can check the version and copyright information 519 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 520: ...Updating the MP Drivers Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Before Installing the MP Drivers Installing the MP Drivers 520 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 521: ...be solved You can access our website and download the latest MP Drivers for your model Important You can download the MP Drivers for free but any Internet access charges incurred are your responsibility Before installing the latest MP Drivers delete the previously installed version Related Topics Before Installing the MP Drivers Installing the MP Drivers 521 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manu...

Страница 522: ...t select XXX MP Drivers where XXX is your model name and then click Remove The confirmation window for uninstalling the model appears Important In Windows 8 1 Windows 8 Windows 7 or Windows Vista a confirmation warning dialog box may appear when starting installing or uninstalling software This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task When you are logged on to a...

Страница 523: ...talled Checking the Printer Status Turn off the printer Checking the Personal Computer Settings Terminate all running applications Log on as a user who has the administrator account Important Before installing the latest MP Drivers delete the previously installed version Related Topics Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers Installing the MP Drivers 523 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 524: ...ases switch to an administrator account and restart the operation from the beginning 3 Install the MP Drivers Take the appropriate action as described on the screen 4 Complete the installation Click Complete Depending on the environment you are using a message prompting you to restart the computer may be displayed To complete the installation properly restart the computer Important You can install...

Страница 525: ...Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Printing Photo Data Printing Documents PDF File Saved on a USB Flash Drive 525 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 526: ...Photo Data Printing Photographs Saved on a USB Flash Drive Setting Items for Photo Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Using Useful Display Functions 526 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 527: ...is displayed Note If both photo files and PDF files are saved on USB flash drive the confirmation screen to select which file you print is displayed Tap Print photos in the displayed screen If no printable photo data is saved on the USB flash drive Data of supported types are not saved is displayed on the touch screen If more than 2 000 photo data are saved on the USB flash drive the photo data is...

Страница 528: ...r each photo B Number of copies Tap to specify the number of copies 1 Flick vertically to specify the number of copies Tap to display the photo selection screen 2 Tap to specify the number of copies Touch and hold to specify the number of copies by 10 copies Note You can specify the number of copies for each photo Display the photo you want to print then specify the number of copies when the desir...

Страница 529: ...t quality and so on For details on the setting items Setting Items for Photo Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine E Zooming in Tap to zoom in on the photo For details Using Useful Display Functions F Date specification Tap to select photo with specifying the date last modified date of data 529 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 530: ...rocessing the print job you can add the print job Reserve photo print Adding the Print Job Adding the Print Job You can add the print job Reserve photo print while printing photos Follow the procedure below to add the print job 1 Flick the photo while printing to select the next photo Note While you select the photo the machine prints the reserved photos The reserved photo icon appears on the phot...

Страница 531: ... display the HOME screen change the print menu or print from the computer or other devices While processing the print job the photo in other group is not selected If you press the Stop button while processing the print job the screen to select a method to cancel reservation is displayed If you tap Cancel all reservations you can cancel printing all photos If you tap Cancel the last reservation you...

Страница 532: ...e etc are retained even if another print menu is selected or the machine is turned off 1 Page size Select the page size of the loaded paper 2 Type Media type Select the media type of the loaded paper 3 Paper src Paper source Select the cassette to feed paper Selecting Cassette auto allows the machine to feed paper from the cassette 2 when the cassette 1 runs out of paper under the following condit...

Страница 533: ...Device user settings 533 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 534: ...n screen A Tap the photo you want to print the touch screen returns to single photo display B Tap to display photo with specifying the date Specifying Date to Select Photo C Tap to increase the display photos 54 photos display D Drag to switch the number of display photos to 6 photos 15 photos or 54 photos E Tap to decrease the display photos 6 photos display Specifying Date to Select Photo The fo...

Страница 535: ...on the photo selection screen A Tap to switch the display magnification B Drag to move the display position Switching the Photo Group Note If more than 2 000 photo data are saved on the USB flash drive the photo data is split by group per 2 000 photos in reverse chronological order date last modified automatically The following screen is displayed by tapping on the photo selection screen A Tap to ...

Страница 536: ...h drive Saving a Document in Machine s Memory to USB Flash Drive Saving Received Faxes Automatically on a USB Flash Drive PDF files made using Canon IJ Scan Utility application software compatible with the machine Extension pdf Except for the following data Encrypted data Data more than 2 GB Data including images scanned at 9601 pixels or more in the vertical and horizontal directions For details ...

Страница 537: ...On the preview screen the first page of each PDF file is displayed on the touch screen In addition if a document is in landscape format it will be displayed rotated by 90 degrees For some PDF files it may take longer to display the preview or part of the preview may be cropped The name of the PDF files is displayed even though the PDF files cannot be printed using the operation panel of the machin...

Страница 538: ... the cassette 2 when the cassette 1 runs out of paper under the following conditions A4 Letter or Legal sized plain paper is loaded in the cassette 1 and cassette 2 Yes is selected for Auto feed switch in Cassette settings 5 Print qlty Print quality Specify the print quality 6 2 sidedPrintSetting Select two sided printing or single sided printing If you tap Advanced with 2 sided selected you can s...

Страница 539: ...0 pages of a PDF file print them from a computer Depending on the PDF file it may be printed rotated by 90 degrees If the document size is larger than the page size specified on the machine the document will be printed at a reduced size In this case thin lines on the document may not be printed or images may be misaligned For some PDF files an error message may be displayed before printing starts ...

Страница 540: ...ttings you can specify by the printer driver or on the touch screen Setting the Media Type with the Printer Driver and on the Printer Setting the Paper Size with the Printer Driver and on the Printer For copying specify the paper settings for copying so that they match the cassette paper information Note Depending on the registered cassette paper information the screen to confirm if you apply the ...

Страница 541: ...on the paper loaded in the cassette Replace the paper and print Select if you want to print after replacing the paper of the cassette For example when the paper setting for printing or copying is B5 and the cassette paper information registered to the machine is A4 you load B5 sized paper in the cassette before you start printing or copying The cassette paper information registration screen is dis...

Страница 542: ...for printing or copying Change the paper settings then try printing again Note You can disable the message which prevents misprinting When you disable the message the machine starts printing or copying even though the paper settings for printing or copying and the cassette paper information registered to the machine are different To change the setting using the operation panel Cassette settings To...

Страница 543: ...ic Reducing or Enlarging a Copy Two Sided Copying About Special Copy Menu Copying Two Pages to Fit onto a Single Page Copying Four Pages to Fit onto a Single Page Collated Copying 543 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 544: ...en glass or in the ADF 5 Specify the settings as necessary A The copy layout is displayed Switch the layout single sided 2 on 1 two sided B Tap to specify the number of copies 1 Tap the numbers to specify the number of copies 2 Tap to confirm the number of copies C Tap to register the current print settings as a custom setting Registering the Favorite Settings Custom profiles D Tap to display the ...

Страница 545: ... original on the platen glass or from the document output slot after copying is complete Important If you load the original on the platen glass do not open the document cover or remove the original while Scanning document is displayed on the touch screen If you load the original in the ADF do not move the original until copying is complete Note To cancel copying press the Stop button If you load t...

Страница 546: ...d the original in the ADF you cannot add the copying job When you add the copying job the number of copies or the settings such as the page size or media type cannot be changed If you press the Stop button while reserve copying is in progress the screen to select the method to cancel copying is displayed If you tap Cancel all reservations you can cancel copying all scanned data If you tap Cancel t...

Страница 547: ...pying Four Pages to Fit onto a Single Page Collated Copying The original will be scanned to display the preview image Therefore do not open the document cover until the preview screen is displayed Originals are rescanned after displaying the preview screen and before copying starts Therefore do not open the document cover or remove the original from the platen glass while Scanning document is disp...

Страница 548: ...ation If you keep touching the magnification is changed by 10 E Tap to return to the Copy standby screen F The magnification currently specified is displayed Tap to select Fit to page 548 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 549: ...ase tap on the upper left on the touch screen to confirm the message then change the setting The settings of the page size media type etc are retained even if the machine is turned off When copying starts in the copy menu that is not available with the specified setting The specified function is not available with current settings is displayed on the touch screen Change the setting following the o...

Страница 550: ... plain paper is loaded in the cassette 1 and cassette 2 Yes is selected for Auto feed switch in Cassette settings 6 Print qlty Print quality Adjust print quality according to the original Important If you use Standard with Type set to Plain paper and the quality is not as good as expected select High for Print qlty and try copying again Select High for Print qlty to copy in grayscale Grayscale ren...

Страница 551: ...copies of a multi paged original Collated Copying 11 Frame erase copy When copying thick originals such as books you can make a copy without black margins around the image and gutter shadows Copying Thick Originals Such as Books 551 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 552: ... confirm the magnification B Flick to specify the magnification C Tap to confirm the magnification Reduction enlargement Method Note Some of the reduction enlargement methods are not available depending on the copy menu Fit to page The machine automatically reduces or enlarges the image to fit the page size The setting in Magnif Fit to page Note When you select Fit to page the page size may not be...

Страница 553: ...6 5x7 LTR 183 4x6 LTR Note Some of the preset ratios are not available depending on the country or region of purchase Ratio specified copy You can specify the copy ratio as a percentage to reduce or enlarge copies Note 400 MAX maximum copy ratio and 25 MIN minimum copy ratio are selectable If you make a copy at the same size as the original select Same size 553 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com M...

Страница 554: ...r ADF ADF duplex scan Simplex 2 sidedPrintSetting 2 sided Note When you tap Advanced after tapping 2 sided for 2 sidedPrintSetting you can select the orientation and the stapling side of the paper Also you can select whether to display the preview screen when you load the original on the platen glass When you select Orientation Portrait and Output Long side bind When you select Orientation Portrai...

Страница 555: ...side bind Two sided to Two sided Place to load the original ADF ADF duplex scan Duplex 2 sidedPrintSetting 2 sided Note When you select Duplex for ADF duplex scan and tap Advanced you can select the orientation and the stapling side of the original When you select 2 sided for 2 sidedPrintSetting and tap Advanced you can select the orientation and the stapling side of the paper When you select Orie...

Страница 556: ...ether you use the preview screen If you tap ON the preview screen is displayed so that you can check the orientation Note Two sided copy setting can be used in combination with 2 on 1 copy or 4 on 1 copy Copying Two Pages to Fit onto a Single Page Copying Four Pages to Fit onto a Single Page If you are copying in black white print intensity of the Two sided copy may differ from that of a single si...

Страница 557: ...each sheet of original A Tap to start scanning the original Remove the sheet of original from the platen glass after scanning and load the next sheet on the platen glass then tap Scan B Tap to start copying the original already scanned Note You can add the copying job while printing Adding the Copying Job Reserve copy 557 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 558: ...About Special Copy Menu Copying Thick Originals Such as Books 558 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 559: ...andby screen is displayed tapping allows you to preview an image of the printout on the preview screen Displaying the Preview Screen There may be a narrow black margin that appears around the image This function removes the dark margins only If a scanned book is too thin or when the machine is used near a window or in a bright environment a faint black frame may remain Also if the color of an orig...

Страница 560: ... Orientation Landscape and Top to bottom When you select Orientation Landscape and Bottom to top After selecting the order you can select whether you use the preview screen If you tap ON the preview screen is displayed so that you can check the orientation Note This function can be used in combination with Two sided copy If you use this function in combination you can copy four original pages on o...

Страница 561: ...ears after scanning each sheet of original A Tap to start scanning the original Remove the sheet of original from the platen glass after scanning and load the next sheet on the platen glass then tap Scan B Tap to start copying the original already scanned Note You can add the copying job while printing Adding the Copying Job Reserve copy If you use this function in combination with Two sided copy ...

Страница 562: ...re available Select 4 on 1 copy then tap OK If you tap Advanced with 4 on 1 copy selected you can specify the orientation and the order of the original Note The order is the same regardless of the orientation When you select Upper left to right When you select Upper right to left When you select Upper left to bottom When you select Upper right to bottom 562 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manua...

Страница 563: ...t paper on the Print settings screen For details on two sided copy function Two Sided Copying When Loading the Original on the platen glass Before scanning When the preview function is activated the machine starts pre scanning before scanning the original When pre scanning is finished the screen below preview screen is displayed on the LCD A Tap to rotate the original by 180 degrees B Tap to start...

Страница 564: ...ting Adding the Copying Job Reserve copy If you use this function in combination with Two sided copy the screen above is displayed after scanning the fourth sheet of original is complete Follow the on screen instructions to scan the rest of originals 564 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 565: ... sided copy If you use this function in combination select the two sided copy setting for ADF duplex scan and 2 sidedPrintSetting and the stapling side of print paper on the Print settings screen For details on two sided copy function Two Sided Copying The number of pages the machine can read varies with the document If Device memory is full Cannot continue process appears on the LCD when scanning...

Страница 566: ...See Two Sided Copying for two sided copying 566 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 567: ...Scanning Scanning from a Computer Scanning from the Operation Panel of the Machine 567 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 568: ...nning with Application Software that You are Using ScanGear Useful Information on Scanning IJ Network Scanner Selector EX Menu and Setting Screen Other Scanning Methods Placing Items When Scanning from a Computer 568 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 569: ...Items Larger than the Platen Image Stitch Extracting Text from Scanned Images OCR Sending Scanned Images via E mail Scanning Multiple Items at One Time Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time from the ADF Auto Document Feeder Scanning Both Sides of Each Document at One Time Saving after Checking Scan Results IJ Scan Utility Screens 569 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 570: ...purpose Note Refer to IJ Scan Utility Main Screen for details on the IJ Scan Utility main screen Save Scanned Images Automatically Scanned images are automatically saved in a preset folder You can change the folder as required Note The default save folders are as follows Windows 8 1 Documents folder Windows 8 My Documents folder Windows 7 My Documents folder Windows Vista Documents folder Windows ...

Страница 571: ...Note Refer to Settings Dialog Box for how to set the applications to integrate with 571 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 572: ... below to start IJ Scan Utility Windows 8 1 Windows 8 Select IJ Scan Utility on the Start screen to start IJ Scan Utility If IJ Scan Utility is not displayed on the Start screen select the Search charm then search for IJ Scan Utility Windows 7 Windows Vista Windows XP From the Start menu select All Programs Canon Utilities IJ Scan Utility IJ Scan Utility to start IJ Scan Utility 572 Downloaded fro...

Страница 573: ...size resolution etc in the Settings Document Scan dialog box as required When setting is completed click OK 4 Click Document Scanning starts Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan Scanned images are saved in the folder set for Save in in the Settings Document Scan dialog box displayed by clicking Settings In the Settings Document Scan dialog box you can also make advanced scan settings 573 Downloade...

Страница 574: ...per size resolution etc in the Settings Photo Scan dialog box as required When setting is completed click OK 4 Click Photo Scanning starts Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan Scanned images are saved in the folder set for Save in in the Settings Photo Scan dialog box displayed by clicking Settings In the Settings Photo Scan dialog box you can also make advanced scan settings 574 Downloaded from M...

Страница 575: ...ox as required When setting is completed click OK Note Once the settings are made you can scan with the same settings from the next time 3 Place the item on the platen Placing Items When Scanning from a Computer 4 Click Custom Scanning starts Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan Scanned images are saved in the folder set for Save in in the Settings Custom Scan dialog box displayed by clicking Sett...

Страница 576: ...orted Note The following explains how to scan from the item to be placed on the left side 1 Start IJ Scan Utility 2 Click Settings then set the item type resolution etc in the Settings Scan and Stitch dialog box as required When setting is completed click OK 3 Click Stitch The Image Stitch window appears 4 In Select Output Size select an output size according to the paper size 576 Downloaded from ...

Страница 577: ...tion 6 Place the item that is to be displayed on the left side of the screen face down on the platen 7 Click Start Scanning Image 1 The first item is scanned and appears in 1 Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan 577 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 578: ...platen 9 Click Start Scanning Image 2 The second item is scanned and appears in 2 Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan 10 Adjust the scanned images as required Use the Toolbar to rotate or zoom in out or drag the images to adjust their positions 578 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 579: ... the thumbnail at the top of the screen then click Delete The selected image is deleted allowing you to scan the item again 11 Click Save The combined image is saved Note Refer to Image Stitch Window for details on the Image Stitch window You can make advanced scan settings in the Settings Scan and Stitch dialog box displayed by clicking Settings 579 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 580: ...ge in the Settings General Settings dialog box Select the language you want to extract in Document Language and scan You can add the application from the pull down menu 3 Click OCR Scanning starts When scanning is completed the scanned images are saved according to the settings and the extracted text appears in the specified application Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan Text displayed in your t...

Страница 581: ... Documents with colors in the background of text Documents containing multiple languages 581 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 582: ...mail Scanning starts When scanning is completed the specified e mail client starts and the images will be attached to a new message Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan The scanned images are saved according to the settings made in the Settings dialog box When the Check scan results checkbox is selected in the Settings dialog box the Save Settings dialog box appears After you set the save options ...

Страница 583: ...ckground Items printed on white paper hand written documents business cards etc Thin items Thick items Refer to Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear Scanner Driver for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details Note The screens for scanning with favorite settings are used as examples in the following descriptions 1 Place the items on the platen Placing Items When Scanni...

Страница 584: ...5 Select Select Source according to the items to be scanned 6 Select Auto scan for Paper Size then click OK 584 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 585: ... Custom Scan Dialog Box Settings OCR Dialog Box Settings E mail Dialog Box 7 Click Custom Multiple items are scanned at one time Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan Scanned images are saved in the folder set for Save in in the corresponding Settings dialog box displayed by clicking Settings In each Settings dialog box you can also make advanced scan settings 585 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com...

Страница 586: ...documents at one time from the ADF when scanning via Document Custom ScanGear OCR or E mail Refer to Scanning with Application Software that You are Using ScanGear for your model from Home of the Online Manual for how to scan using ScanGear scanner driver The screens for scanning documents are used as examples in the following descriptions 1 Place the documents on the ADF Placing Documents ADF Aut...

Страница 587: ...nt ADF Manual Duplex 6 Set the color mode document size and scanning resolution as required Click Document Scan Orientation Settings to specify the orientation of the documents to be scanned In the displayed dialog box you can specify the Orientation and Binding Side How to place the documents when scanning the back sides depends on the Binding Side When setting is completed click OK 587 Downloade...

Страница 588: ...dialog box Settings Document Scan Dialog Box Settings Custom Scan Dialog Box Settings OCR Dialog Box Settings E mail Dialog Box 7 Click Document Scanning starts Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan When Document ADF Manual Duplex is selected for Select Source proceed to Step 8 588 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 589: ...the documents Note The screens for scanning with Orientation set to Portrait are used as examples in the following descriptions When Long edge is Selected for Binding Side in Document Scan Orientation Settings Place the documents after rotating the output documents 180 degrees When Short edge is Selected for Binding Side in Document Scan Orientation Settings Place the documents without changing th...

Страница 590: ...el the scan Scanned images are saved in the folder set for Save in in the corresponding Settings dialog box displayed by clicking Settings In each Settings dialog box you can also make advanced scan settings 590 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 591: ...Scanning with Application Software that You are Using ScanGear for your model from Home of the Online Manual for how to scan using ScanGear scanner driver The screens for scanning documents are used as examples in the following descriptions 1 Place the documents on the ADF Placing Documents ADF Auto Document Feeder 2 Start IJ Scan Utility 3 Click Settings The Settings dialog box appears 4 Click Do...

Страница 592: ...can Options when scanning via Document ADF Platen 6 Set the color mode document size and scanning resolution as required Click Document Scan Orientation Settings to specify the orientation of the documents to be scanned In the displayed dialog box you can specify the Orientation and Binding Side 592 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 593: ...m Scan Dialog Box Settings OCR Dialog Box Settings E mail Dialog Box 7 Click Document Both sides of the documents are scanned automatically Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan Scanned images are saved in the folder set for Save in in the corresponding Settings dialog box displayed by clicking Settings In each Settings dialog box you can also make advanced scan settings 593 Downloaded from Manuals...

Страница 594: ...sults before saving when scanned using the operation panel Note The screens for scanning photos are used as examples in the following descriptions 1 Start IJ Scan Utility 2 Click Settings The Settings dialog box appears 3 Click Photo Scan 4 Select the Check scan results checkbox then click OK 594 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 595: ...og Box Settings Photo Scan Dialog Box Settings Custom Scan Dialog Box Settings Scan and Stitch Dialog Box Settings ScanGear Dialog Box Settings OCR Dialog Box Settings E mail Dialog Box 5 Click Photo Scanning starts When scanning is completed the Save Settings dialog box appears Note Click Cancel to cancel the scan 595 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 596: ...Settings dialog box Note The default save folders are as follows Windows 8 1 Documents folder Windows 8 My Documents folder Windows 7 My Documents folder Windows Vista Documents folder Windows XP My Documents folder 7 Click OK Scanned images are saved according to the settings 596 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 597: ...itch Dialog Box Settings ScanGear Dialog Box Settings OCR Dialog Box Settings E mail Dialog Box Settings Save to PC Photo Dialog Box Settings Save to PC Document Dialog Box Settings Attach to E mail Photo Dialog Box Settings Attach to E mail Document Dialog Box Settings General Settings Dialog Box Save Settings Dialog Box Image Stitch Window 597 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 598: ...not the one you want to use select the desired product from the list In addition for network connection select one with Network after the product name Note Refer to Network Scan Settings for how to set up a network environment Document Scans items as documents and saves them to a computer Scan save settings and the response after scanning can be specified in the Settings Document Scan dialog box P...

Страница 599: ...ng Scan save settings and applications can be specified in the Settings ScanGear dialog box OCR Scan text in scanned magazines and newspapers and display it in a specified application Scan save settings and applications can be specified in the Settings OCR dialog box E mail You can send scanned images via e mail Scan save settings and applications can be specified in the Settings E mail dialog box...

Страница 600: ...you can make advanced settings to functions on each tab Scanning from a Computer Tab You can specify how to respond when scanning from IJ Scan Utility Settings Document Scan Dialog Box Settings Photo Scan Dialog Box Settings Custom Scan Dialog Box Settings Scan and Stitch Dialog Box Settings ScanGear Dialog Box Settings OCR Dialog Box Settings E mail Dialog Box 600 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter c...

Страница 601: ...Document Dialog Box Settings Attach to E mail Photo Dialog Box Settings Attach to E mail Document Dialog Box General Settings Tab You can set the product to use file size restriction on e mail attachment language to detect text in images and folder in which to save images temporarily Settings General Settings Dialog Box 601 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 602: ...ems as documents 1 Scan Options Area 2 Save Settings Area 3 Application Settings Area 1 Scan Options Area Select Source Select the type of item to be scanned Scanning documents Document or Document ADF Platen Scanning magazines Magazine Scanning documents from the ADF Auto Document Feeder Document ADF Simplex Document ADF Manual Duplex Document ADF Duplex or Document ADF Platen 602 Downloaded from...

Страница 603: ...r the Width and Height and then click OK Note Click Defaults to restore the specified settings to the default settings Resolution Select the resolution of the item to be scanned The higher the resolution value the more detail in your image Resolution Note Only 300 dpi or 400 dpi can be set when Start OCR is selected in Application Settings Document Scan Orientation Settings This appears when you s...

Страница 604: ... Reduce show through Sharpens text in an item or reduces show through in newspapers etc Reduce moire Reduces moire patterns Printed materials are displayed as a collection of fine dots Moire is a phenomenon where uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are scanned Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Reduce moire Reduce gutt...

Страница 605: ... can be selected from Document Language in the Settings General Settings dialog box are supported The orientation may not be detected for the following types of settings or documents since the text cannot be detected correctly Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points Documents containing special fonts effects italics or hand writ...

Страница 606: ...ommended that you normally select this setting High Compresses the file size when saving allowing you to reduce the load on your network server Important This appears only when PDF or PDF Multiple Pages is selected in Data Format When Black and White is selected in Color Mode this option does not appear JPEG Image Quality You can specify the image quality of JPEG files Important This appears only ...

Страница 607: ...n specify the application from the pull down menu Send to a folder Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to a folder other than the one specified in Save in You can specify the folder from the pull down menu Attach to e mail Select this when you want to send e mails with the scanned images attached You can specify the e mail client you want to start from the pull down menu Star...

Страница 608: ...os 1 Scan Options Area 2 Save Settings Area 3 Application Settings Area 1 Scan Options Area Select Source Photo is selected Color Mode Select the color mode in which to scan the item Paper Size Select the size of the item to be scanned When you select Custom a screen in which you can specify the paper size appears Select a Unit then enter the Width and Height and then click OK 608 Downloaded from ...

Страница 609: ...ts are appended to the set file name in the _20XX0101_0001 format Note When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox the date and four digits are appended to the set file name Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images To change the folder specify the destination folder in the Select Destination Folder dialog box displayed by selecting Add from the pull do...

Страница 610: ... this when you want to enhance or correct the scanned images You can specify the application from the pull down menu Send to an application Select this when you want to use the scanned images as they are in an application that allows you to browse or organize images You can specify the application from the pull down menu Send to a folder Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to...

Страница 611: ...Defaults You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings 611 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 612: ... Application Settings Area 1 Scan Options Area Select Source Select the type of item to be scanned Select Auto to detect the item type automatically and to set Color Mode Paper Size and Resolution automatically as well Important Item types supported by Auto are photos postcards business cards magazines newspapers documents and BD DVD CD To scan the following types of items specify the item type or...

Страница 613: ...he image into text data after scanning specify Select Source instead of selecting Auto To reduce moire set Select Source to Magazine Color Mode Select the color mode in which to scan the item Note Only Color is available when Select Source is Auto Paper Size Select the size of the item to be scanned When scanning both sides of the documents automatically from the ADF select A4 or Letter When you s...

Страница 614: ... when you select Auto for Select Source Scans both sides of the documents placed on the ADF Image Processing Settings Click Plus to set the following Available setting items vary by Select Source When Select Source is Auto Apply recommended image correction Applies suitable corrections automatically based on the item type Important The color tone may differ from the source image due to corrections...

Страница 615: ... appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are scanned Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Reduce moire Reduce gutter shadow Reduces gutter shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets Important This function is available only when scanning from the platen Note Use ScanGear scanner driver s Advanced Mode tab to correct gutter shadows when scanni...

Страница 616: ...ly Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points Documents containing special fonts effects italics or hand written text Documents with patterned backgrounds In that case select the Check scan results checkbox and rotate the image in the Save Settings dialog box 2 Save Settings Area File Name Enter the file name of the image to be sav...

Страница 617: ...ur network server Important This appears only when PDF PDF Multiple Pages or Auto is selected in Data Format When Black and White is selected in Color Mode this option does not appear Create a PDF file that supports keyword search Select this checkbox to convert text in images into text data and create PDF files that support keyword search Important This appears only when PDF PDF Multiple Pages or...

Страница 618: ... Save in You can specify the folder from the pull down menu Attach to e mail Select this when you want to send e mails with the scanned images attached You can specify the e mail client you want to start from the pull down menu Start OCR Select this when you want to convert text in the scanned image into text data You can specify the application from the pull down menu Do not start any application...

Страница 619: ... than the platen 1 Scan Options Area 2 Save Settings Area 3 Application Settings Area 1 Scan Options Area Select Source Select the type of item to be scanned Scanning photos Photo Scanning documents Document Scanning magazines Magazine Note To reduce moire set Select Source to Magazine Color Mode Select the color mode in which to scan the item Resolution Select the resolution of the item to be sca...

Страница 620: ... a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are scanned Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Reduce moire 2 Save Settings Area File Name Enter the file name of the image to be saved When you save a file the date and four digits are appended to the set file name in the _20XX0101_0001 format Note When you select the Save to a subfolder with current ...

Страница 621: ...ord search Select this checkbox to convert text in images into text data and create PDF files that support keyword search Important This appears only when PDF or PDF Multiple Pages is selected in Data Format Note PDF files that are searchable in the language selected in Document Language on the General Settings tab of the Settings dialog box are created JPEG Image Quality You can specify the image...

Страница 622: ...own menu Send to a folder Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to a folder other than the one specified in Save in You can specify the folder from the pull down menu Do not start any application Saves to the folder specified in Save in Note Specify the application or folder in the Select Application or Select Destination Folder dialog box displayed by selecting Add from the pu...

Страница 623: ...the date and four digits are appended to the set file name in the _20XX0101_0001 format Note When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox the date and four digits are appended to the set file name Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images To change the folder specify the destination folder in the Select Destination Folder dialog box displayed by selectin...

Страница 624: ...ze when saving allowing you to reduce the load on your network server Important This appears only when PDF or PDF Multiple Pages is selected in Data Format Create a PDF file that supports keyword search Select this checkbox to convert text in images into text data and create PDF files that support keyword search Important This appears only when PDF or PDF Multiple Pages is selected in Data Format ...

Страница 625: ... Send to a folder Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to a folder other than the one specified in Save in You can specify the folder from the pull down menu Attach to e mail Select this when you want to send e mails with the scanned images attached You can specify the e mail client you want to start from the pull down menu Start OCR Select this when you want to convert text i...

Страница 626: ...nt or Document ADF Platen Scanning magazines Magazine Scanning documents from the ADF Auto Document Feeder Document ADF Simplex Document ADF Manual Duplex Document ADF Duplex or Document ADF Platen Note When Document ADF Platen is selected and documents are placed both on the platen and ADF those placed on the ADF will be scanned Color Mode Select the color mode in which to scan the item Paper Siz...

Страница 627: ...Resolution Note For Resolution only 300 dpi or 400 dpi can be set Document Scan Orientation Settings This appears when you select ADF for Select Source Click to display the Document Scan Orientation Settings dialog box in which you can set the orientation and binding side of the documents to be scanned from the ADF Important Binding Side cannot be specified when scanning only the front side of eac...

Страница 628: ...s when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are scanned Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Reduce moire Reduce gutter shadow Reduce gutter shadow platen Reduces gutter shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets Important This function is available only when scanning from the platen Note Use ScanGear scanner driver s Advanced Mode tab to correct gutte...

Страница 629: ...ly Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points Documents containing special fonts effects italics or hand written text Documents with patterned backgrounds In that case select the Check scan results checkbox and rotate the image in the Save Settings dialog box 2 Save Settings Area File Name Enter the file name of the image to be sav...

Страница 630: ...date folder in the folder specified in Save in and save scanned images in it The folder will be created with a name such as 20XX_01_01 Year_Month_Date If this checkbox is not selected files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in Check scan results Displays the Save Settings dialog box after scanning 3 Application Settings Area OCR Application Displays the extracted text in a specifi...

Страница 631: ...the item type automatically and to set Color Mode Paper Size and Resolution automatically as well Important Item types supported by Auto are photos postcards business cards magazines newspapers documents and BD DVD CD To scan the following types of items specify the item type or size You cannot scan correctly with Auto A4 size photos Text documents smaller than 2L 5 inches x 7 inches 127 mm x 178 ...

Страница 632: ...s automatically from the ADF select A4 or Letter When you select Custom a screen in which you can specify the paper size appears Select a Unit then enter the Width and Height and then click OK Note Only Auto is available when Select Source is Auto Click Defaults in the screen in which you can specify the paper size to restore the specified settings to the default settings Resolution Select the res...

Страница 633: ...n the item type Important The color tone may differ from the source image due to corrections In that case deselect the checkbox and scan Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function When Select Source is Photo Important When Color Mode is Black and White Image Processing Settings is not available Sharpen outline Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image Whe...

Страница 634: ...s function is available only when scanning from the platen Note Use ScanGear scanner driver s Advanced Mode tab to correct gutter shadows when scanning non standard size items or specified areas Refer to Gutter Shadow Correction for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details When you enable this function scanning may take longer than usual with network connection Correct slanted text do...

Страница 635: ...heck scan results checkbox and rotate the image in the Save Settings dialog box 2 Save Settings Area File Name Enter the file name of the image to be saved When you save a file the date and four digits are appended to the set file name in the _20XX0101_0001 format Note When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox the date and four digits are appended to the set file name Save...

Страница 636: ...ct this checkbox to convert text in images into text data and create PDF files that support keyword search Important This appears only when PDF PDF Multiple Pages or Auto is selected in Data Format Note PDF files that are searchable in the language selected in Document Language on the General Settings tab of the Settings dialog box are created Save to a subfolder with current date Select this chec...

Страница 637: ...he Select Application dialog box displayed by selecting Add from the pull down menu Instructions Opens this guide Defaults You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings 637 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 638: ...n Options Area 2 Save Settings Area 3 Application Settings Area 1 Scan Options Area Paper Size Set from the operation panel Resolution Set from the operation panel 2 Save Settings Area File Name Enter the file name of the image to be saved When you save a file the date and four digits are appended to the set file name in the _20XX0101_0001 format Note When you select the Save to a subfolder with c...

Страница 639: ...irectly in the folder specified in Save in 3 Application Settings Area Open with an application Select this when you want to enhance or correct the scanned images You can specify the application from the pull down menu Send to an application Select this when you want to use the scanned images as they are in an application that allows you to browse or organize images You can specify the application...

Страница 640: ...operation panel 1 Scan Options Area 2 Save Settings Area 3 Application Settings Area 1 Scan Options Area Paper Size Set from the operation panel Resolution Set from the operation panel Image Processing Settings Click Plus to set the following Apply Auto Document Fix Select this checkbox to sharpen text in a document or magazine for better readability Important The color tone may differ from the so...

Страница 641: ...e or small fonts Documents with small amount of text Documents containing figures images Hand written text Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines tables Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Correct slanted text document Detect the orientation of text document and rotate image Automatically rotates the image to the correct orientation by detecting the orientation o...

Страница 642: ...ile that supports keyword search Select this checkbox to convert text in images into text data and create PDF files that support keyword search Note PDF files that are searchable in the language selected in Document Language on the General Settings tab of the Settings dialog box are created Save to a subfolder with current date Select this checkbox to create a current date folder in the folder spe...

Страница 643: ...ot start any application Saves to the folder specified in Save in Note Specify the application or folder in the Select Application or Select Destination Folder dialog box displayed by selecting Add from the pull down menu Instructions Opens this guide Defaults You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings 643 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 644: ...n panel 1 Scan Options Area 2 Save Settings Area 3 Application Settings Area 1 Scan Options Area Paper Size Set from the operation panel Resolution Set from the operation panel 2 Save Settings Area File Name Enter the file name of the image to be saved When you save a file the date and four digits are appended to the set file name in the _20XX0101_0001 format Note When you select the Save to a sub...

Страница 645: ...e Select this checkbox to create a current date folder in the folder specified in Save in and save scanned images in it The folder will be created with a name such as 20XX_01_01 Year_Month_Date If this checkbox is not selected files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in 3 Application Settings Area E mail Client Specify the e mail client to use for attaching scanned images You can s...

Страница 646: ...n Options Area 2 Save Settings Area 3 Application Settings Area 1 Scan Options Area Paper Size Set from the operation panel Resolution Set from the operation panel Image Processing Settings Click Plus to set the following Apply Auto Document Fix Select this checkbox to sharpen text in a document or magazine for better readability Important The color tone may differ from the source image due to cor...

Страница 647: ... both vertical and horizontal lines tables Note Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Correct slanted text document Detect the orientation of text document and rotate image Automatically rotates the image to the correct orientation by detecting the orientation of text in the scanned document Important Only text documents written in languages that can be selected from Document Language i...

Страница 648: ...files that support keyword search Note PDF files that are searchable in the language selected in Document Language on the General Settings tab of the Settings dialog box are created Save to a subfolder with current date Select this checkbox to create a current date folder in the folder specified in Save in and save scanned images in it The folder will be created with a name such as 20XX_01_01 Year...

Страница 649: ...tion Select appears on the right side of the product name Click Select to display IJ Network Scanner Selector EX from which you can change the scanner to use Refer to Network Scan Settings for the setting procedure E mail Attachment Size You can restrict the size of scanned images to be attached to an e mail You can select Small Suitable for 640 x 480 Windows Medium Suitable for 800 x 600 Windows ...

Страница 650: ...ons Rotate Left 90 Rotate Right 90 Rotates scanned images 90 degrees counter clockwise or clockwise Select the image you want to rotate then click Rotate Left 90 or Rotate Right 90 Important The preview operation buttons do not appear when the Enable large image scans checkbox is selected in the Settings ScanGear dialog box 2 Scan Results Area Displays the thumbnails of the scanned images You can ...

Страница 651: ...ect JPEG Exif TIFF PNG PDF or PDF Multiple Pages Important You cannot select PDF or PDF Multiple Pages in the following cases When scanned by clicking Photo in the IJ Scan Utility main screen The Enable large image scans checkbox is selected in Save Settings of the Settings ScanGear dialog box Start OCR is selected in Application Settings of the Settings Document Scan Settings Custom Scan or Setti...

Страница 652: ...DF Multiple Pages is selected in Data Format Note PDF files that are searchable in the language selected in Document Language on the General Settings tab of the Settings dialog box are created Save to a subfolder with current date Select this checkbox to create a current date folder in the folder specified in Save in and save scanned images in it The folder will be created with a name such as 20XX...

Страница 653: ...lect source and view 1 Settings and Operation Buttons Select Output Size B4 B5 x 2 Scans the left and right halves of a B4 size item separately A3 A4 x 2 Scans the left and right halves of an A3 size item separately 11 x 17 Letter x 2 Scans the left and right halves of an item twice as large as Letter size separately Full Platen x 2 Scans the left and right halves of an item twice as large as the ...

Страница 654: ...the scan area in preview If no area is specified the image of the size selected in Select Output Size will be saved If an area is specified only the image in the cropping frame will be scanned and saved Adjusting Cropping Frames in the Image Stitch Window Save Save Saves the two scanned images as one image 654 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 655: ...ft Rotates the preview image 90 degrees counter clockwise Invert Vertically Rotates the preview image 180 degrees Rotate Right Rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise Open Guide Opens this page 3 Thumbnail View Area Displays the thumbnails of the scanned images Appears blank if none has been scanned 4 Preview Area Displays the scanned images You can adjust the layout by dragging the scanned...

Страница 656: ...clicking Start Scanning Image 1 The image is scanned in the direction specified in Scan Direction and 2 appears next to it After scanning the second item by clicking Start Scanning Image 2 The two scanned images appear 656 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 657: ...Related Topic Scanning Items Larger than the Platen Image Stitch 657 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 658: ...ents from the ADF Auto Document Feeder in Advanced Mode Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear Scanner Driver Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear Scanner Driver ScanGear Scanner Driver Screens Placing Items When Scanning from a Computer Adjusting Cropping Frames ScanGear General Notes Scanner Driver Important Available functions and settings vary depending on your s...

Страница 659: ...nables you to preview scan results or set document type and output size etc when scanning documents It is useful when you want to scan in a specific color tone as it allows you to make various corrections and adjust brightness contrast etc Screens There are two modes Basic Mode and Advanced Mode Switch modes by clicking a tab on the upper right of the screen Note ScanGear starts in the last used m...

Страница 660: ...Advanced Mode Use the Advanced Mode tab to specify the color mode output resolution image brightness color tone etc when scanning 660 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 661: ...ng ScanGear Scanner Driver Scanning in Basic Mode Scanning in Advanced Mode Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF Auto Document Feeder in Advanced Mode Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear Scanner Driver 661 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 662: ...J Scan Utility for your model from Home of the Online Manual for how to start IJ Scan Utility 2 Click ScanGear in the IJ Scan Utility main screen The ScanGear screen appears Starting from an Application Follow these steps example to start ScanGear from an application The procedure varies depending on the application For details refer to the application s manual 1 Start the application 2 On the men...

Страница 663: ...at have a whitish background Documents printed on white paper hand written text business cards etc Thin documents Thick documents The following types of documents may not be scanned correctly Documents smaller than 1 2 inches 3 cm square Photos that have been cut to various shapes Note When using a model supporting ADF duplex scanning you can scan both sides of the documents automatically from the...

Страница 664: ...elect Source Note Colors are adjusted based on the document type selected in Select Source 4 Set Destination Note Skip ahead to Step 7 when an ADF type is selected for Select Source 5 Set Output Size according to purpose Output size options vary by the item selected in Destination 6 Adjust the cropping frames scan areas as required Adjust the size and position of the cropping frames on the preview...

Страница 665: ...ch you can check the current scan settings document type etc A response of ScanGear after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box Related Topic Basic Mode Tab 665 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 666: ... In that case click Thumbnail on the Toolbar to switch to whole image view and scan Photos that have a whitish background Documents printed on white paper hand written text business cards etc Thin documents Thick documents The following types of documents may not be scanned correctly Documents smaller than 1 2 inches 3 cm square Photos that have been cut to various shapes 1 Place the document on t...

Страница 667: ...g Cropping Frames ScanGear Image Settings Color Adjustment Buttons 7 Click Scan Scanning starts Note Click Information to open a dialog box in which you can check the current scan settings document type etc A response of ScanGear after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box Related Topic Advanced Mode Tab 667 Downloaded f...

Страница 668: ...ts on the ADF of the machine then start ScanGear scanner driver Placing Documents ADF Auto Document Feeder Starting ScanGear Scanner Driver 2 Click the Advanced Mode tab and select Document ADF Simplex or Document ADF Duplex for Select Source Note Settings are not retained when you switch modes You can select Document ADF Duplex when using a model supporting ADF duplex scanning 3 Set Input Setting...

Страница 669: ... the current scan settings document type etc A response of ScanGear after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box Related Topic Advanced Mode Tab 669 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 670: ...k documents Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View The following types of documents may not be scanned correctly Documents smaller than 1 2 inches 3 cm square Photos that have been cut to various shapes Note You can also scan multiple documents at one time from the Advanced Mode tab Use the Advanced Mode tab to make advanced scan settings such as the color mode output resolution image bri...

Страница 671: ...ing to purpose 6 Adjust the cropping frames and set Image corrections as required Note You can correct each image separately Select the frame you want to correct In thumbnail view you can only create one cropping frame per image To create multiple cropping frames in an image scan in whole image view Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View 671 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 672: ...uments are not corrected in whole image view 1 After previewing images click Thumbnail on the Toolbar Switch to whole image view Note When the whole image is displayed the icon changes to Whole Image 2 Set Destination 3 Set Output Size according to purpose Invert aspect ratio will be enabled when Output Size is set to anything but Flexible Click this button to rotate the cropping frame Click again...

Страница 673: ...Crop If an area is specified only the portion in the specified area will be scanned Adjusting Cropping Frames ScanGear 5 Set Image corrections as required 6 Click Scan Areas framed by broken lines are scanned Note A response of ScanGear after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box 673 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Ma...

Страница 674: ...ages Unsharp Mask Reduce Dust and Scratches Fading Correction etc Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance Adjusting Brightness and Contrast Adjusting Histogram Adjusting Tone Curve Setting Threshold 674 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 675: ...elect an item from the pull down menu Important Do not apply these functions to images without moire dust scratches or faded colors The color tone may be adversely affected Refer to Image Settings for details and precautions on each function Note Refer to Scanning in Advanced Mode to start the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear and scan Adjusting the image brightness and color tone Set Image Adjustment...

Страница 676: ...recycled paper newspapers etc when scanning documents Set Reduce Show through to ON OFF ON Sharpening slightly out of focus images Set Unsharp Mask to ON OFF ON Reducing gradations and stripe patterns Set Descreen to ON OFF ON 676 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 677: ...cording to the degree of dust and scratches None Medium Correcting photos that have faded with time or due to colorcast Set Fading Correction to Low Medium or High according to the degree of fading or colorcast None Medium Reducing graininess Set Grain Correction to Low Medium or High according to the degree of graininess None Medium Correcting shadows that appear between pages when scanning open ...

Страница 678: ...678 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 679: ...re due to the weather or ambient strong colors Click an arrow in Color Adjustment to emphasize the corresponding color Cyan red magenta green and yellow blue are complementary color pairs each pair produces a shade of gray when mixed You can reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color and increasing the complementary color It is recommended that you find a portion in the i...

Страница 680: ... to the cropping frames scan areas or the frame selected in thumbnail view You can select multiple frames or cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key You can also select a color tone from the color pattern displayed on the left of the Color Pattern screen You can also use this function to add a specific tint to an image Increase the magenta to add a warm tint and increase the b...

Страница 681: ...tc Move Slider under Saturation to the left to decrease the saturation darken the image and to the right to increase the saturation brighten the image You can also enter a value 127 to 127 Saturation decreased Original image Saturation increased Note The natural color tone of the original image may be lost if you increase saturation too much Color Balance Adjust images that have a colorcast Colorc...

Страница 682: ...t color and increasing the complementary color It is usually difficult to correct the image completely by adjusting only one color pair It is recommended that you find a portion in the image where it should be white and adjust all three color pairs so that the portion turns white You can also enter a value 127 to 127 Below is an example of an image in which the Cyan Red pair has been adjusted Cyan...

Страница 683: ...vious view Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window Channel Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red Green and Blue in various proportions gradation These colors can be adjusted individually as a channel Master Adjust the Red Green and Blue combined Red Adjust the Red channel Green Adjust the Green channel Blue Adjust the Blue channel Note Only Grayscale will be displayed in C...

Страница 684: ...d darker parts of an image Increasing contrast will increase the difference thus sharpening the image Decreasing contrast will decrease the difference thus softening the image Move Slider under Contrast to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image You can also enter a value 127 to 127 Decreased contrast Original image Increased contrast Note Increasing the contrast is ef...

Страница 685: ...lue in various proportions gradation These colors can be adjusted individually as a channel Master Adjust the Red Green and Blue combined Red Adjust the Red channel Green Adjust the Green channel Blue Adjust the Blue channel Note Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale Reading Histograms You can see the histogram of a specified area for each Channel The higher the ...

Страница 686: ... and white point All parts to the right of White point Slider will turn white level 255 When Image Adjustment is set to anything but None the adjustments shown below are performed automatically Moving the Black point and White point Sliders Move the Black point Slider or White point Slider to adjust brightness Images with more data distributed to the highlight side Move the Black point Slider towa...

Страница 687: ...side Adjusting Histograms Using the Droppers When you select a Channel and click the Black point Mid point or White point Dropper the mouse pointer on the preview image changes to a dropper Click a Dropper displayed below the histogram to change the setting The point clicked with Black point Dropper will be the darkest point You can also enter a value 0 to 245 The point clicked with Mid point Drop...

Страница 688: ...ick the area you want to adjust the color in the preview image The clicked point will be set as the achromatic color reference and the rest of the image is adjusted accordingly For instance if snow in a photo appears bluish click the bluish part to adjust the whole image and reproduce natural colors 688 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 689: ...and Blue in various proportions gradation These colors can be adjusted individually as a channel Master Adjust the Red Green and Blue combined Red Adjust the Red channel Green Adjust the Green channel Blue Adjust the Blue channel Note Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale Reading Tone Curves With ScanGear scanning images via a scanner is the input and displaying ...

Страница 690: ...ting in a bright toned image when viewed on a monitor Underexposure Concave curve The midtone data of the input side is stretched toward the shadow of the output side resulting in a dark toned image when viewed on a monitor High contrast S curve The highlight and shadow of the input side are enhanced resulting in a high contrast image Reverse the negative positive image Downward sloping line The i...

Страница 691: ...Edit custom curve You can drag specific points on the Tone Curve to freely adjust the brightness of the corresponding areas 691 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 692: ...hreshold The brightness of color and grayscale images is expressed in a value between 0 and 255 However in creating black and white images all colors are mapped to either black 0 or white 255 Threshold is the borderline value that determines a color as black or white Move Slider to the right to increase the threshold value and thus increase the black areas Move the slider to the left to decrease t...

Страница 693: ...ens Basic Mode Tab Advanced Mode Tab Input Settings Output Settings Image Settings Color Adjustment Buttons Preferences Dialog Box Scanner Tab Preview Tab Scan Tab Color Settings Tab 693 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 694: ...ce Photo Color Scan color photos Magazine Color Scan color magazines Document Color Scan documents in color Document Grayscale Scan documents in black and white Document Color ADF Simplex Scan documents from the ADF in color Document Grayscale ADF Simplex Scan documents from the ADF in black and white Document Color ADF Duplex only for models supporting ADF duplex scanning Scan both sides of docum...

Страница 695: ...l scan Note When using the machine for the first time scanner calibration starts automatically Wait a while until the preview image appears Destination Select what you want to do with the scanned image Print Select this to print the scanned image on a printer Image display Select this to view the scanned image on a monitor OCR Select this to use the scanned image with OCR software OCR software is ...

Страница 696: ...pping frame will be scanned You can drag the cropping frame to enlarge reduce it while maintaining the aspect ratio Add Delete Opens the Add Delete the Output Size dialog box in which you can specify custom output sizes You can select this option when Destination is Print or Image display In the Add Delete the Output Size dialog box you can specify multiple output sizes and save them at one time S...

Страница 697: ... and Correct fading are available when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box Note Available functions vary by the document type selected in Select Source Apply Auto Document Fix Sharpens text in a document or magazine for better readability Important Scanning may take longer than usual when this checkbox is selected The color tone may change from the sourc...

Страница 698: ...ew Thumbnail Whole Image Switches the view in the Preview area 3 Preview Area Rotate Left Rotates the preview image 90 degrees counter clockwise The result will be reflected in the scanned image The image returns to its original state when you preview again Rotate Right Rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise The result will be reflected in the scanned image The image returns to its origina...

Страница 699: ...k broken lines and applies the settings to all of them Remove Cropping Frame Removes the selected cropping frame Information Displays the version of ScanGear and the current scan settings document type etc Open Guide Opens this page 3 Preview Area This is where a trial image appears after you click Preview You can also check the results of the settings image corrections color adjustments etc made ...

Страница 700: ... frame to zoom in on the image Click Frame Advance at the bottom of the screen to display the previous or next frame Double click the frame again to return the display to its non magnified state When Whole Image is displayed on the Toolbar Items on the Platen are scanned and displayed as a single image All portions in the cropping frames will be scanned Note You can specify the cropping frame on t...

Страница 701: ...Related Topic Scanning in Basic Mode 701 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 702: ...tion is not available when scanning from the ADF Auto Document Feeder 1 Settings and Operation Buttons Favorite Settings You can name and save a group of settings Input Settings Output Settings Image Settings and Color Adjustment Buttons on the Advanced Mode tab and load it as required It is convenient to save a group of settings if you will be using it repeatedly You can also use this to reload t...

Страница 703: ...stments to its highlight and shadow values histogram or balance tone curve Zoom Zooms in on a frame or zooms in on the image in the area specified with a cropping frame scan area When zoomed in Zoom changes to Undo Click Undo to return the display to its non magnified state In thumbnail view When multiple images are displayed in thumbnail view clicking this button zooms in on the selected frame Cl...

Страница 704: ...mages if the total size of the scanned images exceeds a certain size In that case a warning message appears it is recommended that you reduce the total size To continue scan in whole image view Preferences Opens the Preferences dialog box in which you can make scan preview settings Close Closes ScanGear scanner driver 2 Toolbar You can adjust or rotate preview images The buttons displayed on the T...

Страница 705: ...wise The result will be reflected in the scanned image The image returns to its original state when you preview again Auto Crop Displays and adjusts the cropping frame automatically to the size of the document displayed in the Preview area The scan area is reduced every time you click this button if there are croppable areas within the cropping frame Check All Frames Available when two or more fra...

Страница 706: ...canned images are displayed Only the images with the checkbox selected will be scanned Note When multiple images are previewed different outlines indicate different selection status Focus Frame thick blue outline The displayed settings will be applied Selected Frame thin blue outline The settings will be applied to the Focus Frame and Selected Frames simultaneously You can select multiple images b...

Страница 707: ...create one cropping frame per image In whole image view you can create multiple cropping frames Adjusting Cropping Frames ScanGear Related Topic Scanning in Advanced Mode Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF Auto Document Feeder in Advanced Mode 707 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 708: ...s available in whole image view only When scanning both sides of the documents automatically from the ADF select A4 or Letter When you select a size the Preview area size changes accordingly Important Some applications have a limit to the amount of scan data they can receive Available scan range is as follows 21000 pixels x 30000 pixels or less If you change Paper Size after previewing the preview...

Страница 709: ...lack and white This mode renders the image in black and white The contrast in the image is divided at certain levels threshold level into black and white and is rendered in two colors The threshold level can be set with Threshold Input Size In thumbnail view the cropped document size is displayed after preview In whole image view the Paper Size is displayed before preview and the cropping frame sc...

Страница 710: ...ixels x 96 pixels when Output Resolution is 600 dpi scaled at 100 When Auto Crop is performed in whole image view the aspect ratio will not be maintained since the size will be prioritized Refer to Adjusting Cropping Frames ScanGear for details on cropping frames 710 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 711: ...s Document ADF Simplex or Document ADF Duplex You can enter a value within the range of 25 dpi to 600 dpi Output Size Select an output size Select Flexible to set custom sizes or select a size for printing or displaying Select Add Delete to set custom size and save it as a new output size option Flexible You can specify the output resolution and scale and adjust the cropping frames scan areas In t...

Страница 712: ...put Size dialog box in which you can specify custom output sizes In the Add Delete the Output Size dialog box you can specify multiple output sizes and save them at one time Saved items will be registered to the Output Size list and can be selected along with the predefined items Adding Select Print or Image display for Destination then enter Output Size Name Width and Height then click Add For Un...

Страница 713: ... Size is set to anything but Flexible Click this button to rotate the cropping frame Click again to return it to the original orientation Data Size The data size when scanned with the current settings is displayed Note When the data size exceeds a certain size the value appears in red In that case a warning message appears when you click Scan It is recommended that you adjust the settings to reduc...

Страница 714: ...et the brightness of the specified portion of the image is optimized Images can be adjusted according to the automatically detected document type or the specified document type The result of the adjustment will be reflected in the entire image None Image Adjustment will not be applied Auto Applies Image Adjustment by automatically detecting the document type It is recommended that you normally sel...

Страница 715: ... and Document or Magazine is selected for Image Adjustment Unsharp Mask Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image when scanning photos OFF Unsharp Mask will not be applied ON Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image It is recommended that you normally select this setting Descreen Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots Moire is a ...

Страница 716: ...rect a small amount of fading and colorcast Medium It is recommended that you normally select this setting High Select this to correct a large amount of fading and colorcast This can affect the tone of the image Important You can set Fading Correction after preview You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box Correction may not be ap...

Страница 717: ... weigh 4 4 lbs 2 0 kg or more on the platen Also do not press on the document with a force exceeding 4 4 lbs 2 0 kg If you press heavily the scanner may not work correctly or you might break the glass Align the document with the edge of the Platen If not the shadow will not be corrected properly Shadows may not be corrected properly depending on the document If the page background is not white sha...

Страница 718: ... If the shadow is not corrected properly adjust the cropping frame scan area on the preview image Adjusting Cropping Frames ScanGear 718 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 719: ...ns the results will be reflected in the preview image Click a Color Adjustment Button to set the following items Saturation Color Balance Adjust the saturation vividness and color tone of the image Use this function to brighten colors that have faded with time or due to colorcast Colorcast is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors...

Страница 720: ... in this screen For a color image select a color in Channel to check either Red Green or Blue or select Master to check three colors together If you place the cursor on the preview image the portion will be enlarged and its RGB values only L when Color Mode is Grayscale before and after the adjustments will be displayed Threshold Set the boundary threshold at which black and white are divided By a...

Страница 721: ...ete Click Save to save the settings displayed in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List You can load and apply the saved tone curve threshold settings to a preview image To load the settings select the saved item from the pull down menu Note Save up to 20 items Defaults Reset all adjustments saturation color balance brightness contrast histogram and tone curve 721 Downloaded from Manu...

Страница 722: ...r in which to save images temporarily and set the music file to play during or at the end of a scan Preview Tab Allows you to select what to do with Preview when ScanGear is started how to display cropping frames after previewing images and the cropping size for thumbnails of scanned documents Scan Tab Allows you to select what to do with ScanGear after scanning image Color Settings Tab Allows you...

Страница 723: ...ssage may appear because the computer cannot collect the machine status In that case click OK to exit ScanGear scanner driver Auto Power On Select Enable to turn on the machine automatically when data is received Auto Power Off Specify the amount of time you want to set from the list When this time lapses without any data being received the machine turns off automatically Important When using a ne...

Страница 724: ... specified hours Select this option when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the machine during a specified period of time Set the Start time and End time during which quiet mode is to be activated Important The time specified in Start time and in End time must be different If your scanner or printer does not support fax functions quiet mode is not applied to operations copy direct print etc...

Страница 725: ... and scanning to reproduce correct color tones in scanned images Note Even when Execute at Every Scan is set to OFF the scanner may be calibrated automatically in some cases such as immediately after you turn the machine on Calibration may take time depending on your computer 725 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 726: ...l be displayed at startup Note Select None if you do not want to save the preview image Cropping Frame on Previewed Images Select how to display cropping frames after previewing images Execute Auto Cropping on Previewed Images The cropping frame scan area will automatically be displayed in the document size after previewing Display the Last Frame on Previewed Images A cropping frame of the same si...

Страница 727: ...th and height of the area displayed for the standard size Note When you change the Cropping Size for Thumbnail View setting the preview images will be refreshed and cropped to the new size As the preview images are refreshed the color adjustments and other settings applied to them are reset 727 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 728: ...when scanning is completed Do not close ScanGear automatically Select this to return to the ScanGear screen for another scan when scanning is completed Display the dialog to select next action Select this to open a screen and select what to do when scanning is completed Note Even if Do not close ScanGear automatically or Display the dialog to select next action is set some applications may not sup...

Страница 729: ...ucing time and trouble to manually match the monitor and printer colors Source Scanner Select scanner profile Target Select target profile Monitor Select this checkbox to display preview image with optimum correction for monitor Defaults Returns to the default Color Matching settings Note The Color Adjustment Buttons on the Advanced Mode tab are not available when you select Color Matching This fu...

Страница 730: ...rinter and application settings Monitor Gamma By setting the gamma value of a monitor you can adjust the input data to the brightness characteristics of the monitor Adjust the value if your monitor s gamma value does not match the default value set in ScanGear and the colors of the original image are not accurately reflected in the monitor Click Defaults to return to the default Monitor Gamma valu...

Страница 731: ...r corner of the item with the corner at the arrow alignment mark of the platen Photos that have been cut to various shapes and items smaller than 1 2 inches 3 cm square cannot be cropped accurately when scanning Reflective disc labels may not be scanned as expected For Photos Postcards Business Cards or BD DVD CD For Magazines Newspapers or Documents Placing a Single Item Place the item face down ...

Страница 732: ... Utility With network connection items may not be scanned correctly when five or more items are placed In that case reduce the number of items placed on the platen to four or less then scan again Positions of slanted items 10 degrees or less are corrected automatically Placing Documents ADF Auto Document Feeder Important Do not leave thick items on the platen when scanning from the ADF May result ...

Страница 733: ...he width of the documents Insert the documents face up until a beep sounds Note When scanning duplex documents place the front sides facing up They will not be scanned in the correct page order if placed the other way around 733 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 734: ...g the mouse over a thumbnail to specify a cropping frame In whole image view An active cropping frame is automatically specified around the preview image You can drag the cropping frame in the Preview area to specify the area Note You can change the auto crop setting in the Preferences dialog box Refer to Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in Preview Tab for details Cropping Frame Types 1 Thick cr...

Страница 735: ...r will change into Crosshair Arrow when it is positioned within a cropping frame Click and drag the mouse to move the entire cropping frame Note On the Advanced Mode tab you can specify the cropping frame size by entering the values into Width and Height in Input Settings You can rotate a cropping frame 90 degrees by clicking Switch Aspect Ratio However Switch Aspect Ratio is not available when Ou...

Страница 736: ...ropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key If you select multiple cropping frames and change the settings on a tab at the right of ScanGear the settings will be applied to all the selected cropping frames When you create a new cropping frame it retains the settings of the latest cropping frame Note Create up to 12 cropping frames Scanning takes longer than usual when multiple crop...

Страница 737: ...Remove Cropping Frame on the Toolbar Alternatively press the Delete key When there are multiple cropping frames all the selected cropping frames active cropping frame and selected cropping frames are deleted simultaneously 737 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 738: ...ame time When using a network compatible model by connecting to a network scanning takes longer than usual Make sure that you have adequate disk space available when scanning large images at high resolutions For example at least 300 MB of free space is required to scan an A4 document at 600 dpi in full color ScanGear and WIA driver cannot be used at the same time Do not enter the computer into sle...

Страница 739: ...rge such as when scanning large images at high resolution your computer may not respond or the progress bar may remain at 0 depending on the application In that case cancel the action for example by clicking Cancel on the progress bar then increase the operating system s virtual memory or reduce the image size resolution and retry Alternatively scan the image via IJ Scan Utility first then save an...

Страница 740: ...Useful Information on Scanning Adjusting Cropping Frames in the Image Stitch Window Resolution Data Formats Color Matching 740 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 741: ...frames checkbox an active cropping frame is automatically specified around the image in the Preview area You can drag the cropping frame to specify the area When you perform a scan the image in the area specified with the cropping frame will be scanned Adjusting a Cropping Frame The cursor will change into Arrow when it is positioned over a cropping frame Click and drag the mouse to expand or cont...

Страница 742: ... Settings dialog box ScanGear Scanner Driver Output Resolution in Output Settings on the Advanced Mode tab Appropriate Resolution Settings Set the resolution according to the use of the scanned image Item Type Use Color Mode Appropriate Resolution Color photo Copying Printing Color 300 dpi Creating a postcard Color 300 dpi Saving to a computer Color 300 dpi Using on a website or attaching to e mai...

Страница 743: ...l slow down significantly and you will experience inconvenience such as lack of memory Set the minimum required resolution according to the use of the image Note When you will be printing the scanned image by enlarging it scan by setting a higher resolution than the recommended one above 743 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 744: ... saved and cannot be returned to their original state JPEG is not available for black and white images TIFF Standard File Extension tif A data format featuring a relatively high compatibility between various computers and applications TIFF is suitable for editing saved images Note Some TIFF files are incompatible IJ Scan Utility supports the following TIFF file formats Uncompressed black and white...

Страница 745: ... image s color space is converted from the scanner s color space to sRGB by ScanGear When displaying on a monitor the image s color space is converted from sRGB to the monitor s color space based on the operating system s monitor settings and the application s working space settings When printing the image s color space is converted from sRGB to the printer s color space based on the application s...

Страница 746: ...tor EX is not displayed on the Start screen select the Search charm then search for IJ Network Scanner Selector EX Windows 7 Windows Vista Windows XP From the Start menu click All Programs Canon Utilities IJ Network Scanner Selector EX IJ Network Scanner Selector EX Menu Displays a menu when you right click IJ Network Scanner Selector EX in the notification area on the desktop Disable Canon IJ Net...

Страница 747: ...er a network Important When using a model with which you cannot scan over a network from the operation panel that model does not appear in Scanners and the setting is not available Scan from Operation Panel Settings Screen Click Scan from Operation Panel Settings in the Scan from PC Settings screen to display the Scan from Operation Panel Settings screen Scanners MAC addresses of the scanners or p...

Страница 748: ...ot appear refer to Problems with Network Communication for your model from Home of the Online Manual You do not need to use this software when scanning via USB Refer to Uninstalling IJ Network Scanner Selector EX to delete it You can scan via USB even if it is not deleted 748 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 749: ...e User Account Control screen appears click Continue Windows 7 Windows Vista 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel Programs Programs and Features 2 Select Canon IJ Network Scanner Selector EX then click Uninstall Change Note If the User Account Control screen appears click Continue Windows XP 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel Add or Remove Programs 2 Select Canon IJ Network Scanner S...

Страница 750: ...Other Scanning Methods Scanning with WIA Driver Scanning Using the Control Panel Windows XP Only 750 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 751: ...Search charm then click Network displayed by searching for Network Windows 7 From the Start menu select Computer Network Windows Vista From the Start menu select Network 2 Right click XXX_MAC address where XXX is the model name in the displayed screen then select Install Scanning with WIA Driver 2 0 The following is an example of scanning using Windows Fax and Scan 1 Place the item on the platen o...

Страница 752: ...600 dpi Brightness Move the slider to adjust the brightness Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the image You can also enter a value 100 to 100 Contrast Move the slider to adjust the contrast Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image thus softening the image Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image thus sharpening the image You can also ent...

Страница 753: ...re Grayscale picture Black and white picture or text and Custom Settings Note When using the scanner or printer with network connection the options for the type of picture may differ from those displayed with USB connection To scan with the values previously set in Adjust the quality of the scanned picture select Custom Settings Selecting Document Feeder for Paper source enables you to select Page...

Страница 754: ...Brightness and Contrast 5 Click Preview to preview the image The preview image appears on the right Drag to specify the scan area Important With network connection scan without preview when scanning documents from the ADF If you preview place the document again and scan If there is document left in the ADF after previewing press the OK button on the operation panel and remove the document 6 Click ...

Страница 755: ...ick Canon XXX series where XXX is the model name The Scanner and Camera Wizard dialog box appears 3 Click Next 4 Select Picture type according to the item to be scanned To scan from the platen select Flatbed for Paper source To scan from the ADF Auto Document Feeder select Document Feeder Note To scan with the values previously set in Custom settings select Custom Selecting Document Feeder for Pap...

Страница 756: ...the right will increase the contrast of the image thus sharpening the image You can also enter a value 127 to 127 Resolution DPI Enter the resolution Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi Resolution Picture type Select the type of scan you want for your item Reset Click to restore the original settings 6 Click Preview to preview the image The preview image appears on the right Drag to specify...

Страница 757: ...upper corner of the item with the corner at the arrow alignment mark of the platen Photos that have been cut to various shapes and items smaller than 1 2 inches 3 cm square cannot be cropped accurately when scanning Reflective disc labels may not be scanned as expected For Photos Postcards Business Cards or BD DVD CD For Magazines Newspapers or Documents Placing a Single Item Place the item face d...

Страница 758: ...ess are corrected automatically Placing Documents ADF Auto Document Feeder Important Do not leave thick items on the platen when scanning from the ADF May result in paper jam Place and align documents of the same size when scanning two or more documents Refer to Originals You Can Load for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details on supported document sizes when scanning from the ADF 1...

Страница 759: ...Note When scanning duplex documents place the front sides facing up They will not be scanned correctly if placed the other way around 759 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 760: ...ed Data on the USB Flash Drive Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Forwarding Scanned Data to Shared Folder on the Computer Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Deleting Scanned Data on USB Flash Drive Setting Items for Scanning Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Network Scan Settings Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using IJ Scan Utility 760 Downloaded from...

Страница 761: ...you perform scanning via a network connection make sure that all the required settings have been specified Network Scan Settings The destination and the file name are specified in Canon IJ Scan Utility You can specify the destination and the file name in Canon IJ Scan Utility For details on settings of Canon IJ Scan Utility Settings Dialog Box 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Flick the ...

Страница 762: ... document type Note When you forward the scanned data to the computer searched using WSD you cannot select the document type Document Scans the original on the platen glass or in the ADF as a document data applying the settings specified in Scan settings Photo Scans the original on the platen glass as a photo data applying the settings specified in Scan settings B Tap to display Scan settings scre...

Страница 763: ... continue scanning is displayed after scanning is complete If you continue scanning load the original on the platen glass and start scanning If you do not continue scanning tap End The scanned data is forwarded to the computer Scanned data is forwarded to the computer according to the settings specified in Canon IJ Scan Utility Remove the original on the platen glass or from the document output sl...

Страница 764: ...it or print the scanned images using the compatible application software to make better use of them Scanning with IJ Scan Utility Note You can use a WIA compliant application software and the Control Panel Windows XP only to scan originals with this machine For details Other Scanning Methods If you want to convert a scanned document to text Extracting Text from Scanned Images OCR 764 Downloaded fr...

Страница 765: ...anning via a network connection make sure that all the required settings have been specified Network Scan Settings The mail software and the file name are specified in Canon IJ Scan Utility You can specify the destination and the file name in Canon IJ Scan Utility For details on settings of Canon IJ Scan Utility Settings Dialog Box 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Flick the HOME screen ...

Страница 766: ...g items Setting Items for Scanning Using the Operation Panel of the Machine C Tap to register the current scan settings as a custom setting Registering the Favorite Settings Custom profiles D Tap to display the screen to select the destination 6 Load the original document on the platen glass or in the ADF 7 Press the Color button for color scanning or the Black button for black white scanning Note...

Страница 767: ...ter and attached to an e mail according to the settings specified in Canon IJ Scan Utility For the settings or how to send an e mail refer to the mail software s instruction manual Remove the original on the platen glass or from the document output slot after scanning is complete When the program selection screen is displayed If you are using Windows 8 1 Windows 8 Windows 7 or Windows Vista The pr...

Страница 768: ...ty for damage to or loss of data for whatever reason even within the warranty period 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Flick the HOME screen then tap Scan Using the Operation Panel The screen for selecting to which you save the data is displayed 3 Insert the USB flash drive into the USB flash drive port 4 Tap USB flash drive Note When the message informing you that the operation restrict...

Страница 769: ...s a custom setting Registering the Favorite Settings Custom profiles D Tap to display the screen to select the destination 7 Load the original document on the platen glass or in the ADF 8 Press the Color button for color scanning or the Black button for black white scanning Note If the original is not loaded properly a message is displayed on the touch screen Load the original on the platen glass ...

Страница 770: ...file When you scan the originals continuously you can save up to 100 pages of images in one PDF file Remove the original on the platen glass or from the document output slot after scanning is complete Note If the USB flash drive becomes full while scanning images is in progress only the images already scanned can be saved You can save up to 2000 files of scanned data in both PDF and JPEG data form...

Страница 771: ...older in Canon Quick Toolbox For details on settings of Canon Quick Toolbox Destination Folder Settings Follow the procedure below to forward scanned data to the shared folder on the computer 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Flick the HOME screen then tap Scan Using the Operation Panel The screen for selecting to which you save the data is displayed 3 Tap Destination folder Note When th...

Страница 772: ...s Setting Items for Scanning Using the Operation Panel of the Machine C Tap to register the current scan settings as a custom setting Registering the Favorite Settings Custom profiles D Tap to display the screen to select the destination 6 Load the original document on the platen glass or in the ADF 7 Press the Color button for color scanning or the Black button for black white scanning Note If th...

Страница 773: ...starts scanning and scanned data is saved on the shared folder of the computer When you select PDF or Compact PDF for Format on the scan setting screen the confirmation screen asking you if you continue scanning is displayed after scanning is complete If you continue scanning load the original on the platen glass and start scanning If you do not continue scanning tap End The scanned data is forwar...

Страница 774: ... When the message informing you that the operation restriction is enabled ask the administrator of the machine you are using For details on the operation restriction of the machine About the Machine Administration 5 Tap Delete saved data The file list is displayed 6 Select the data to delete File name list Preview screen A Flick to display the file name then tap to delete the data When the format ...

Страница 775: ...on the touch screen C Tap to switch the file type displayed on the touch screen D Flick to display the data then tap to delete the data E Tap to display the file name list 7 Tap Yes on the confirmation screen The machine starts deleting the file 775 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 776: ...pe selected for Doc type or the scan menu on the screen for selecting to which you save the data If the setting which cannot be specified in combination is selected and Error details are displayed on the touch screen In this case tap on the upper left on the touch screen to confirm the message then change the setting The specified scan settings other than ADF orientation and ADF duplex scan such a...

Страница 777: ...le when Photo is selected for Doc type 6 ADF duplex scan Select the scanning method when using ADF When you select Duplex tap Advanced to select the stapling side This setting item is not available when Photo is selected for Doc type 7 Reduce show thru Reducing show through Characters on the back may show through when scanning a thin document such as a newspaper Select ON if characters seem to sho...

Страница 778: ...etting item is not available when Photo is selected for Doc type Note Even if ON is selected for this setting some moire effects may remain if Unsharp mask is set to ON In that case select OFF for Unsharp mask 9 Unsharp mask The outline of small characters or thin objects such as a hair or leaves on a photo can be accentuated Select ON if you want to accentuate the outline of the scanned data 778 ...

Страница 779: ... If your scanner or printer is not selected in IJ Scan Utility check that it is selected with IJ Network Scanner Selector EX Refer to IJ Network Scanner Selector EX Menu and Setting Screen for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details To scan from the operation panel specify your scanner or printer with IJ Network Scanner Selector EX beforehand 1 Check that IJ Network Scanner Selector ...

Страница 780: ...ion Panel Settings screen as well Setting for Scanning with IJ Scan Utility To scan from IJ Scan Utility using a scanner or printer connected to a network specify your scanner or printer with IJ Network Scanner Selector EX then follow the steps below to change the connection status between it and the computer 1 Start IJ Scan Utility 2 Select Canon XXX series Network where XXX is the model name for...

Страница 781: ...anner Selector EX Windows 7 Windows Vista Windows XP From the Start menu click All Programs Canon Utilities IJ Network Scanner Selector EX IJ Network Scanner Selector EX The icon appears in the notification area on the desktop and the Scan from PC Settings screen appears In that case skip ahead to Step 3 2 In the notification area on the desktop right click IJ Network Scanner Selector EX then sele...

Страница 782: ...installing the MP Drivers Network communication between your scanner or printer and computer is enabled If your scanner or printer still does not appear refer to Problems with Network Communication for your model from Home of the Online Manual 782 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 783: ...hen scanning from the operation panel Note The screens for scanning photos from the operation panel are used as examples in the following descriptions 1 Start IJ Scan Utility 2 Click Settings The Settings dialog box appears 3 Select a scan mode on the Scanning from the Operation Panel tab 783 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 784: ... Dialog Box Settings Save to PC Document Dialog Box Settings Attach to E mail Photo Dialog Box Settings Attach to E mail Document Dialog Box 4 Set Scan Options 5 Specify the file name and other settings in Save Settings 784 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 785: ...u want to start after scanning in Application Settings 7 Click OK The responses will be executed according to the specified settings when you start scanning from the operation panel 785 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 786: ...ring for Faxing Sending Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Registering Recipients Receiving Faxes Other Useful Fax Functions Sending Faxes from a Computer 786 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 787: ... line or telephone Setting Up the Machine The machine must be set up depending on your telephone line and use of the faxing function Follow the procedure below to set up the machine 1 Connecting the Telephone Line Connect the machine to your telephone line 2 Setting the Telephone Line Type Set the correct telephone line type for your telephone line 3 Setting the Receive Mode Set the receiving oper...

Страница 788: ...mission or reception the fax image may be corrupted or a communication error may occur Such services as Caller ID etc may not operate properly on the telephone If you cannot avoid parallel connections set the receive mode to TEL priority mode understanding that the above problems may occur You will only be able to receive faxes manually Basic Connection Make sure that the machine is turned off con...

Страница 789: ...the external device jack Connecting Various Lines This section introduces how to connect various lines These are examples and could not be guaranteed to suit every connecting condition For details refer to the instruction manual supplied with the network device control devices such as an xDSL Digital Subscriber Line modem or terminal adapter you are connecting to this machine Note xDSL is the gene...

Страница 790: ...the modem do not branch the telephone line before the splitter wall side And also do not connect splitters in parallel The machine may not be able to operate properly Note When connecting to the xDSL line select the same line type as you are subscribing to in Telephone line type Setting the Telephone Line Type Connecting to an ISDN Line For details on ISDN Integrated Service Digital Network connec...

Страница 791: ...h as an xDSL modem or terminal adapter the telephone line type may not be selected correctly In this case set the line type manually For details on how to set the Telephone line type manually in China Setting the Telephone Line Type Manually in China Note Telephone line type will not appear in countries or regions where Rotary pulse is not supported You can print USER S DATA LIST to check the curr...

Страница 792: ...t the machine is turned on 2 Flick the HOME screen then tap Setup Using the Operation Panel 3 Tap Device settings 4 Tap FAX settings 5 Tap FAX user settings 6 Tap Telephone line auto selection The current telephone line type is displayed 7 Check the current telephone line type then tap OK Note If you do not need to change the telephone line type press the HOME button to return to the HOME screen 8...

Страница 793: ...Rotary pulse Select when your telephone line type is pulse dialing Touch tone Select when your telephone line type is tone dialing 793 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 794: ...onnect a telephone or an answering machine to the external device jack of this machine For details on how to connect the telephone or the answering machine to the machine Basic Connection Setting the Receive Mode This section describes the procedure to select the receive mode 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Flick the HOME screen then tap FAX Using the Operation Panel 3 Tap Function lis...

Страница 795: ...th a telephone or answering machine connected to the machine and subscribing to a ring pattern detection service provided by your telephone company When a call incomes the telephone will ring The machine detects a fax call by the fax ring pattern If the call is a fax the machine will receive the fax automatically If the machine does not detect the fax ring pattern the telephone will continue ringi...

Страница 796: ...er of times the external device rings in TEL priority mode select FAX only mode on the Receive mode settings screen specify the number of times the external device rings with Ring count then switch to TEL priority mode in Receive mode settings If you subscribe to Duplex Ringing service in Hong Kong we recommend that you select Manual auto switch OFF Advanced setting in FAX only mode You can specif...

Страница 797: ...cally receive the fax if the ring pattern is a fax call To use DRPD follow the procedure below to set the fax ring pattern that matches the pattern assigned by your telephone company Note Contact your local telephone company for detailed information on this service 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Flick the HOME screen then tap FAX Using the Operation Panel 3 Tap Function list The Funct...

Страница 798: ...s name is printed when sending faxes E Page number Note You can print USER S DATA LIST to confirm the sender information you have registered Summary of Reports and Lists When sending faxes in black white you can select whether to print the sender information inside or outside the image area Specify the setting on TTI position in Advanced FAX settings under FAX settings Advanced FAX settings You ca...

Страница 799: ...ettings 4 Tap Device user settings 5 Tap Date time setting 6 Set the date 1 Tap a setting item to change 2 Tap the number to enter Enter only the last two digits of the year 3 Tap OK 4 Tap OK again when all settings are completed 7 Set the time 1 Tap a setting item to change 799 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 800: ...utomatically change the time by registering the date and time that daylight saving time summer time begins and ends Important Not all the latest information of all countries or regions is applied for Daylight saving time setting by default You need to change the default setting according to the latest information of your country or region Note This setting may not be available depending on the cou...

Страница 801: ...pecify the setting Tap OK again when all settings are completed 2 Set the time in 24 hour format when summer time starts Tap a setting item to change then specify the setting Tap OK again when all settings are completed 8 Set the date and time when summer time ends 1 Set the date when summer time ends Tap a setting item to change then specify the setting Tap OK again when all settings are complete...

Страница 802: ...ormation Note Before sending a fax be sure to enter your name and fax telephone number in Unit name and Unit TEL on the User information settings screen for US only 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Flick the HOME screen then tap Setup Using the Operation Panel 3 Tap Device settings 4 Tap FAX settings 5 Tap FAX user settings 6 Tap User information settings The screen to register the unit...

Страница 803: ... enter the name up to 24 characters including spaces For details on how to enter or delete characters Entering Numbers Letters and Symbols 8 Enter the unit fax telephone number 1 Tap the entry field under Unit TEL The screen to enter the number is displayed 2 Enter the unit fax telephone number 3 Tap OK 803 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 804: ...ax telephone number up to 20 digits including spaces For details on how to enter or delete characters Entering Numbers Letters and Symbols 9 Tap Register to finalize registration 804 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 805: ...on Panel of the Machine Sending Faxes by Entering Fax Telephone Number Basic Resending Faxes Redialing a Busy Number Setting Items for Sending Faxes Sending Faxes Using Useful Functions 805 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 806: ... on 2 Load documents on the platen glass or in the ADF Important When sending a double sided document load the document on the platen glass Double sided documents cannot be automatically scanned and sent from the ADF Note For details on the types conditions of document and how to load the document Loading Originals 3 Flick the HOME screen then tap FAX Using the Operation Panel The Fax standby scre...

Страница 807: ...rrent state The current state is displayed I Scan contrast and resolution Setting Items for Sending Faxes Note If you have not set up the machine for sending receiving faxes yet the message for setup is displayed on the touch screen when you tap FAX on the HOME screen for the first time When you set up for faxing follow the procedure according to the instructions on the touch screen 4 Dial the rec...

Страница 808: ...Settings Custom profiles 5 Press the Color button for color transmission or the Black button for black white transmission The machine starts scanning the document Important Color transmission is available only when the recipient s fax machine supports color faxing Do not open the document cover until scanning is completed 6 Start sending If you load the document in the ADF The machine scans the do...

Страница 809: ...ap Scan After scanning all pages tap Send now to start sending Note To cancel sending the fax press the Stop button Note When your machine is connected to a PBX Private Branch Exchange system refer to the operating instructions of the system for details on dialing the recipient s fax telephone number In case the machine was not able to send a fax such as when the recipient s line was busy it has t...

Страница 810: ...aling You can enable or disable automatic redialing If you enable automatic redialing you can specify the maximum number of redial attempts and the length of time the machine waits between redial attempts Enable and specify the automatic redialing setting on Auto redial in Advanced FAX settings under FAX settings Advanced FAX settings Important While automatic redialing the unsent fax is stored in...

Страница 811: ... fax machine supports color faxing Note For manual redialing the machine memorizes up to 10 recent recipients dialed by entering the fax telephone numbers Note that the machine does not memorize any recipients dialed using the redial function or selecting from the directory To cancel manual redialing press the Stop button To cancel a fax transmission while it is in progress press the Stop button t...

Страница 812: ...recipient s fax machine is not compatible with Extra fine 300 x 300 dpi the fax will be sent in the Standard or Fine resolution Photo Suitable for photographs Note When sending a color fax documents are always scanned in the same resolution 200 x 200 dpi The image quality compression rate is determined by which scan resolution is selected except that Extra fine and Photo provide the same image qua...

Страница 813: ...ter Speaking on Telephone Sending a Fax to the Registered Recipient Sending the Same Document to Several Recipients Sequential Broadcasting Preventing Mistransmission of Faxes Using the On Hook Dial Function 813 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 814: ...ring Fax Telephone Number To speak to the recipient before sending a fax you need to connect a telephone to the machine For details on how to connect the telephone to the machine Basic Connection Note For details on the basic sending operations Sending Faxes by Entering Fax Telephone Number 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Flick the HOME screen then tap FAX Using the Operation Panel The...

Страница 815: ...9 Hang up the handset Note To cancel a fax transmission press the Stop button To cancel a fax transmission while it is in progress press the Stop button then follow the instructions on the touch screen If documents remain in the ADF after the Stop button is pressed while scanning is in progress Document in ADF Tap OK to eject document is displayed on the touch screen By tapping OK the remaining do...

Страница 816: ...ng on Telephone Note For details on the basic sending operations Sending Faxes by Entering Fax Telephone Number 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Load documents on the platen glass or in the ADF 3 Flick the HOME screen then tap FAX Using the Operation Panel The Fax standby screen is displayed 4 Adjust the scan contrast and resolution as necessary Setting Items for Sending Faxes 5 Tap Dir...

Страница 817: ...lor transmission is available only when the recipient s fax machine supports color faxing Note To cancel a fax transmission press the Stop button To cancel a fax transmission while it is in progress press the Stop button then follow the instructions on the touch screen If documents remain in the ADF after the Stop button is pressed while scanning is in progress Document in ADF Tap OK to eject docu...

Страница 818: ...correct registration of fax telephone numbers When you send important documents it is recommended that you send them one by one after speaking on the telephone Sending a Fax after Speaking on Telephone Note If you frequently send documents to the same group of recipients you can group these numbers for group dialing This will allow you to send documents to all the recipients in the group by simply...

Страница 819: ... of fax telephone numbers and enter the number Sending Faxes by Entering Fax Telephone Number Note If FAX number re entry in Security control under FAX settings is set to ON enter the number again Security control By redialing Tap Redial and select a number in the outgoing call logs Manual Redialing 6 Add the recipient 1 Tap Add recipient The list of the recipients is displayed 2 Select a method t...

Страница 820: ...umber or by selecting a number from the outgoing call logs If you want to delete the recipient tap a recipient that you want to delete from the list After the confirmation screen is displayed tap Yes to delete the recipient 7 Press the Color button for color transmission or the Black button for black white transmission Important Color transmission is available only when the recipient s fax machine...

Страница 821: ...he Stop button is pressed while scanning is in progress Document in ADF Tap OK to eject document is displayed on the touch screen By tapping OK the remaining documents are automatically ejected 821 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 822: ...ther the recipient s fax machine information matches the dialed number Sending Faxes after Checking Information Checking the Recipient s Information Sending Faxes after Dialing Twice Fax Number Re entry Set FAX number re entry to ON following the procedure below 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Flick the HOME screen then tap Setup Using the Operation Panel 3 Tap Device settings 4 Tap FA...

Страница 823: ...n Telephone 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Flick the HOME screen then tap Setup Using the Operation Panel 3 Tap Device settings 4 Tap FAX settings 5 Tap Security control 6 Tap Check RX FAX information 7 Tap ON Important Transmission will be canceled if the machine fails to receive the recipient s fax information or if the received information does not match the fax telephone number 82...

Страница 824: ...k dial function only when Hook key setting in Security control under FAX settings is set to Enable Security control For details on the basic sending operations Sending Faxes by Entering Fax Telephone Number 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Load documents in the ADF 3 Flick the HOME screen then tap FAX Using the Operation Panel The Fax standby screen is displayed 4 Adjust the scan contra...

Страница 825: ...k button for black white transmission Important Color transmission is available only when the recipient s fax machine supports color faxing Note To cancel a fax transmission press the Stop button To cancel a fax transmission while it is in progress press the Stop button then follow the instructions on the touch screen If documents remain in the ADF after the Stop button is pressed while scanning i...

Страница 826: ...Registering Recipients Registering Recipients Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Registering Recipients Using Speed Dial Utility 826 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 827: ...document to all the registered recipients in the group Registering Recipients in Group Dial You can register up to 100 recipients in total of individual recipients and group dials Note To change the registered information of the recipient or the group dial see Changing Registered Information To delete the registered information of the recipient or the group dial see Deleting Registered Information...

Страница 828: ...isplayed 4 Tap TEL number registration 5 Tap Directory registration The screen to select an ID number is displayed Note If you already registered the recipients the recipients name is displayed next to the ID number If you already registered the group dial the icon and the group name are displayed next to the ID number 6 Select an unregistered ID number 7 Tap Register recipient 8 Select a registra...

Страница 829: ...t this registration method the screen to select the fax telephone number or the name from the incoming call logs is displayed Select a fax telephone number or name from the incoming call logs the screen to register the recipient s fax telephone number and name is displayed Go to next step Note This registration method may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase 10 Enter the...

Страница 830: ...he fax telephone number go to next step 1 Tap the entry field of fax telephone numbers The screen to enter the number is displayed 2 Enter the recipient s fax telephone number 3 Tap OK Note You can enter the fax telephone number up to 60 digits 40 digits for the US Canada Korea and some regions of Latin America including spaces Entering Numbers Letters and Symbols When Telephone line type in FAX u...

Страница 831: ... unregistered ID number and operate in the same procedure You can check the recipient s numbers and names you have registered by printing RECIPIENT TELEPHONE NUMBER LIST Printing a List of the Registered Destinations 831 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 832: ...on list The Function list screen is displayed 4 Tap TEL number registration 5 Tap Directory registration The screen to select an ID number is displayed Note If you already registered the recipients the recipients name is displayed next to the ID number If you already registered the group dial the icon and the group name are displayed next to the ID number 6 Select an unregistered ID number 7 Tap G...

Страница 833: ...me 3 Tap OK Note You can enter the name up to 16 characters including spaces Entering Numbers Letters and Symbols 9 Register the members 1 Tap Add member The machine s directory is displayed Display by name Display by ID number A Tap to switch the display by name and by ID number 833 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 834: ...d in order from the recipient of the ID number selected D The recipients that can be registered are displayed 2 Tap a recipient to register as group member The member to register is displayed on the list Note To delete the recipient from the group dial tap a recipient that you want to delete from the list After the confirmation screen is displayed tap Yes to delete the recipient from the group dia...

Страница 835: ...ration Note To register another group select an unregistered ID number and operate in the same procedure You can check the recipients you have registered to the group dial by printing GROUP DIAL TELEPHONE NO LIST Printing a List of the Registered Destinations 835 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 836: ...eld of name or the entry field of fax telephone numbers The each edit screen is displayed 3 Change the name or the fax telephone numbers 4 Tap OK The touch screen returns to the registered information screen 5 Tap Register To change a group dial 1 Tap Edit group dial The registered information screen of the group dial is displayed 2 To change the group name tap the entry field of name When edit sc...

Страница 837: ...p Function list The Function list screen is displayed 4 Tap TEL number registration 5 Tap Directory registration 6 Tap a recipient or a group dial to delete 7 Delete the registered information To delete an individual recipient 1 Tap Delete recipient 2 When the confirmation screen is displayed tap Yes to delete To delete a group dial 1 Tap Delete group dial 2 When the confirmation screen is display...

Страница 838: ... 5 Tap Print reports lists 6 Tap Directory list 7 Tap an item to print If you selected Recipient The confirmation screen to select whether to print the list in alphabetical order of the registered names is displayed If you tap Yes Prints RECIPIENT TELEPHONE NUMBER LIST with the destination names in alphabetical order If you tap No Prints RECIPIENT TELEPHONE NUMBER LIST in the order of the ID numbe...

Страница 839: ...d that you backup the registered data on the computer using Speed Dial Utility Starting Up Speed Dial Utility Speed Dial Utility Dialog box Saving Registered Information on the Machine to Your Computer Registering a Fax telephone Number Using Speed Dial Utility Changing a Fax telephone Number Using Speed Dial Utility Deleting a Fax telephone Number Using Speed Dial Utility Changing Sender Informat...

Страница 840: ...ble with LAN connection make sure that the machine is connected to the computer with LAN connection to use Speed Dial Utility via LAN connection Follow the procedure below to start up Speed Dial Utility 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Start up Speed Dial Utility In Windows 8 1 or Windows 8 select Speed Dial Utility on the Start screen to start Speed Dial Utility If Speed Dial Utility i...

Страница 841: ...ion for editing Choose one item from TEL Number Registration User Information Setting and Rejected Number Setting 4 Registered information list Displays the registered information selected for Setting Item List 5 Edit Select All Delete Edits deletes the registered information or selects all the registered information selected for Setting Item List When multiple items on the registered information ...

Страница 842: ...ing Speed Dial Utility is neither saved on the computer nor registered on the machine 9 Save to PC Saves information edited using Speed Dial Utility on the computer 10 Register to Printer Registers information edited using Speed Dial Utility to the machine 842 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 843: ...dial user s name user s fax telephone number or rejected numbers that registered on the machine to the computer 1 Start up Speed Dial Utility 2 Select the machine from the Printer Name list box then click Display Printer Settings 3 Click Save to PC 4 Enter the file name on the displayed screen then click Save 843 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 844: ...ox then click Display Printer Settings 3 Click TEL Number Registration from Setting Item List The list of registered fax telephone numbers is displayed 4 Select an unoccupied code from the list then click Edit The Individual or Group Selection dialog box is displayed 5 Click Register individual TEL number or Register group dial then click Next If Register individual TEL number is selected 1 Enter ...

Страница 845: ...ne numbers or a group dial repeat steps 4 to 6 To save the registered information on the computer 1 Click Save to PC 2 Enter the file name on the displayed screen then click Save To register the registered information to the machine 1 Click Register to Printer 2 Confirm the message on the display then click OK The information is registered to the machine 845 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manu...

Страница 846: ...m the Printer Name list box then click Display Printer Settings 3 Click TEL Number Registration from Setting Item List The list of registered fax telephone numbers is displayed 4 Select a code to change from the list then click Edit If an individual fax telephone number is selected 1 Enter the new name 2 Enter the new fax telephone number If a group dial is selected 1 Enter the new group name 2 Ad...

Страница 847: ...hone numbers or group dials repeat steps 4 and 5 To save the edited information on the computer 1 Click Save to PC 2 Enter the file name on the displayed screen then click Save To register the edited information to the machine 1 Click Register to Printer 2 Confirm the message on the display then click OK The information is registered to the machine 847 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 848: ...red fax telephone numbers is displayed 4 Select a code to delete from the list then click Delete The selected fax telephone number is deleted To continue deleting fax telephone numbers repeat step 4 Note To delete all fax telephone numbers on the list click Select All then Delete To save the edited information on the computer 1 Click Save to PC 2 Enter the file name on the displayed screen then cl...

Страница 849: ...yed 4 Select an item to change then click Edit The User Information dialog box is displayed 5 Enter the new user s name on User Name and new fax telephone number in TEL Number then click OK To save the edited information on the computer 1 Click Save to PC 2 Enter the file name on the displayed screen then click Save To register the edited information to the machine 1 Click Register to Printer 2 Co...

Страница 850: ...d number 1 Select an unoccupied code from the list then click Edit 2 Enter the fax telephone number in the Rejected Number dialog box then click OK To change a rejected number 1 Select a code to change from the list then click Edit 2 Enter the fax telephone number in the Rejected Number dialog box then click OK To delete a rejected number 1 Select a code to delete from the list then click Delete T...

Страница 851: ...s saved on the computer to the machine 1 Start up Speed Dial Utility 2 Select the machine from the Printer Name list box then click Display Printer Settings 3 Click Load from PC 4 Select the RSD file rsd to register to the machine 5 Click Open on the dialog box 6 Click Register to Printer The registered information on the computer is registered to the machine 851 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com...

Страница 852: ... or Windows Vista 1 Click Start Control Panel Programs Programs and Features 2 Select Canon Speed Dial Utility from the program list then click Uninstall If the User Account Control screen appears click Continue In Windows XP 1 Click Start Control Panel Add or Remove Programs 2 Select Canon Speed Dial Utility from the program list then click Remove 2 Click Yes when the confirmation message appears...

Страница 853: ...Receiving Faxes Receiving Faxes Changing the Paper Settings Memory Reception Receiving Faxes Using Useful Functions 853 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 854: ...eive mode setting Make sure of the receive mode setting displayed on the Fax standby screen Note For details on how to change the receive mode Setting the Receive Mode 4 Load paper Load the sheets of plain paper 5 Specify the paper settings as necessary Changing the Paper Settings This completes the preparation for receiving fax When a fax is received it is printed on the loaded paper automaticall...

Страница 855: ...ll ring when a call incomes Pick up the handset If you hear the fax tone wait for at least 5 seconds after it stops then hang up the handset The machine will receive the fax Note If the machine will not switch to fax reception select FAX again on the HOME screen then the Color or Black button to receive the fax To receive a fax without picking up the handset select Manual auto switch ON in Advance...

Страница 856: ... that you call the answering machine using a mobile phone etc to confirm that messages are recorded successfully in the answering machine Set your answering machine to answering mode and adjust it as follows The entire message should be no longer than 15 seconds In the message tell your callers how to send a fax When the call is a voice call The telephone will ring when a call incomes Pick up the ...

Страница 857: ...hange the number of times to ring the telephone Advanced Settings of Receive Mode When the call is a voice call The telephone will ring when a call incomes When the machine does not detect the fax ring pattern the telephone will continue ringing Pick up the handset and talk on the telephone Note To use this feature you need to subscribe to a compatible service provided by your telephone company Fo...

Страница 858: ...ame of this service varies depending on the country or region of purchase This setting may not be also available depending on the country or region of purchase 858 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 859: ...er is loaded or paper has run out while printing is in progress the received faxes are stored in the machine s memory and the error message for no paper is displayed on the touch screen In this case load paper and tap OK You can also press the Stop button to close the message and print the stored documents in the machine s memory later Printing a Document in Machine s Memory Note If the sender sen...

Страница 860: ...and cassette 2 Yes is selected for Auto feed switch in Cassette settings D 2 sidedPrintSetting Select two sided printing or single sided printing Two sided printing is available for black white faxes Color faxes are printed on the single side of paper regardless of this setting After 2 sided is selected for 2 sidedPrintSetting tap Advanced to specify the stapling side Note When Page size is set to...

Страница 861: ...er FAX settings Auto print settings An error has occurred on the machine If you select Print for Received documents in Auto print settings under FAX settings a received fax will be printed automatically However if any of the following errors occurs the received fax will not be printed It will instead be stored in the machine s memory When the error is resolved the fax stored in the machine s memor...

Страница 862: ...he machine can store up to max 250 pages max 30 documents of faxes in the machine s memory When using ITU T No 1 chart Standard mode If the machine s memory becomes full during memory reception only pages which already have been received are stored in the memory Print the received faxes stored in the machine s memory save them on the USB flash drive or forward received faxes to the shared folder o...

Страница 863: ...eived Faxes Automatically on a USB Flash Drive Forwarding Received Faxes Automatically to Shared Folder on the Computer Remote Reception Rejecting Fax Reception Using the Caller ID Service to Reject Calls 863 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 864: ...ed on the Fax standby screen and the faxes are stored in the machine s memory when the received faxes are not saved on the USB flash drive because the USB flash drive is not inserted or because it is not writable You can save the faxes stored in the machine s memory to the USB flash drive manually Delete the unnecessary fax from machine s memory after saving to the USB flash drive Saving a Documen...

Страница 865: ...f faxes saved on the USB flash drive is as follows Folder name CANON_SC FAXDOC 0001 File name file extension PDF Running numbers starting from FAX_0001 File date The date and time of saving as set in the machine For details on how to set the date and time Setting the Date and Time When removing the USB flash drive set Auto save setting to OFF 865 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 866: ...ot forward to the shared folder because the machine is not connected with the computer or because the shared folder setting is changed You can forward the faxes stored in the machine s memory to the shared folder on the computer manually Delete the unnecessary fax from machine s memory after forwarding to the shared folder Forwarding a Document in Machine s Memory to Shared Folder on the Computer ...

Страница 867: ...to 2000 PDF files to the shared folder on the computer If the machine is disconnected with the computer or if the writing error occurs on the computer while saving faxes is in progress the error message is displayed on the touch screen Tap OK to dismiss the error The faxes forwarded to the shared folder are named with the serial number from FAX_0001 file extension PDF When disconnecting the machin...

Страница 868: ...details on how to switch to tone dialing refer to your telephone s instruction manual If you have an answering machine connected to the machine that can carry out remote control operations the security code for this function may be the same as the remote reception ID In this case change the remote reception ID in Remote RX ID in Remote RX in Advanced FAX settings under FAX settings Advanced FAX se...

Страница 869: ...control 6 Tap FAX reception reject 7 Tap ON 8 Select a condition of rejecting fax reception No sender info Rejects faxes with no caller identification Not in directory Rejects faxes from the senders not registered in the machine s directory Rejected numbers Rejects faxes from the senders registered in the machine as rejected numbers For details on how to register the rejected number see Registerin...

Страница 870: ...o display the screen to enter the fax telephone number Enter the fax telephone number you want to register then tap OK From outgoing call log When you select this registration method the screen to select the fax telephone number from the outgoing call logs is displayed Tap a fax telephone number you want to register From incoming call log When you select this registration method the screen to sele...

Страница 871: ...ed number you want to change 2 Tap Edit 3 Tap the entry field of fax telephone numbers The screen to change the registered rejected number is displayed 4 Change the registered rejected number in the same procedure when you register 5 Finalize registration in the same procedure when you register To delete the registered rejected number 1 Select a registered rejected number you want to delete 2 Tap ...

Страница 872: ...s 5 Tap Security control 6 Tap Caller rejection 7 Tap Yes The Caller rejection conditions screen is displayed 8 Specify the rejection conditions Tap a setting item and select Accept or Reject Anonymous no Selects whether to reject a phone call or fax reception from an anonymous number Out of area no Selects whether to reject a phone call or fax reception out of the subscribed service area Rejected...

Страница 873: ...Note Even if you select Reject the machine rings once The machine may not ring depending on the country or region of purchase 873 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 874: ... Useful Fax Functions Using the Information Services Transmission Reception of Faxes Using ECM Document Stored in Machine s Memory Summary of Reports and Lists 874 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 875: ...ial Function Note You can use the on hook dial function only when Hook key setting in Security control under FAX settings is set to Enable Security control 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Flick the HOME screen then tap FAX Using the Operation Panel The Fax standby screen is displayed 3 Tap 4 Dial the number of the information service 5 When the recorded message for the information serv...

Страница 876: ...to Enable Security control 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Flick the HOME screen then tap FAX Using the Operation Panel The Fax standby screen is displayed 3 Tap 4 Dial the number of the information service 5 When the recorded message for the information service answers tap the Tone key to switch to tone dialing 6 Tap the numbers using the Numeric key in accordance with the message 7 T...

Страница 877: ...hen you dial the number of the information service using the telephone connected to the machine you cannot use the machine to switch to tone dialing For instructions on how to switch to tone dialing refer to your telephone s instruction manual 6 Use the telephone to press the numbers in accordance with the message 7 Hang up the handset to finish using the service 877 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter...

Страница 878: ...t s fax machine is not compatible with ECM the fax will be sent received without automatic error correction To receive color faxes make sure that ECM RX in Adv communication settings in Advanced FAX settings under FAX settings is set to ON Advanced FAX settings To disable ECM transmission reception set ECM TX and ECM RX in Adv communication settings to OFF Transmission may take longer when ECM is ...

Страница 879: ...rd refer to Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord You can print or delete the faxes stored in the machine s memory You can also save the received faxes stored in the machine s memory on the USB flash drive or forward the received faxes stored in the machine s memory to the shared folder on the computer To print a document in the machine s memory Printing a Document in Machine s Memory To delete a d...

Страница 880: ...played 4 Tap Function list The Function list screen is displayed 5 Tap Memory reference The memory list is displayed A Date and time of transaction and fax telephone number B Transaction number TX RX NO A transaction number from 0001 to 4999 indicates a document being sent A transaction number from 5001 to 9999 indicates a document being received C Color information Color is displayed for color tr...

Страница 881: ...hat can be printed is displayed Tap OK to return to the previous screen The confirmation screen to select whether to print only the first page of the document is displayed If you select Yes only the first page of the document will be printed The document is still stored in the machine s memory If you select No all pages of the document will be printed The screen to confirm whether to delete the pr...

Страница 882: ...dby screen is displayed 3 Tap Function list The Function list screen is displayed 4 Tap Memory reference The memory list is displayed A Date and time of transaction and fax telephone number B Transaction number TX RX NO A transaction number from 0001 to 4999 indicates a document being sent A transaction number from 5001 to 9999 indicates a document being received C Color information Color is displ...

Страница 883: ...ted is displayed Tap OK to return to the previous screen The confirmation screen is displayed If you select Yes the specified document is deleted from machine s memory To delete all documents stored in the machine s memory Tap Batch process then tap Delete all documents The confirmation screen is displayed If you select Yes all documents are deleted from machine s memory 883 Downloaded from Manual...

Страница 884: ...eason even within the warranty period Note When saving a specified document you specify it by its transaction number If you do not know the transaction number for your target document print the list of documents MEMORY LIST first Printing a Document in Machine s Memory After saving the fax in the machine s memory to the USB flash drive the fax is still stored in the machine s memory For details on...

Страница 885: ...isplayed Tap OK to return to the previous screen Tap USB flash drive as the destination The specified document is saved on the USB flash drive To save all the received documents stored in the machine s memory on the USB flash drive Tap Batch process then tap Save all RX documents Tap USB flash drive as the destination All documents are saved on the USB flash drive Note You can save up to 250 pages...

Страница 886: ... File date The date and time of saving as set in the machine For details on how to set the date and time Setting the Date and Time 886 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 887: ...n advance For details on how to register the destination folder Destination Folder Settings When forwarding a specified document you specify it by its transaction number If you do not know the transaction number for your target document print the list of documents MEMORY LIST first Printing a Document in Machine s Memory After forwarding the fax in the machine s memory to the shared folder on the ...

Страница 888: ...ry There is no document that can be forwarded is displayed Tap OK to return to the previous screen Tap Destination folder as the destination Tap a destination folder to forward the specified document to the shared folder on the computer Note When you specify a PIN code for a registered folder a screen asking you to enter a PIN code is displayed Entering the PIN code allows you to assign the shared...

Страница 889: ...e all RX documents is selected If the machine is disconnected with the computer or if the writing error occurs on the computer while forwarding faxes is in progress the error message is displayed on the touch screen Tap OK to dismiss the error The faxes forwarded to the shared folder are named with the serial number from FAX_0001 file extension PDF 889 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 890: ...f the recipient and group dial For details on the procedure to print see Printing Report or List USER S DATA LIST Lists the current settings of the machine and the registered sender information For details on the procedure to print see Printing Report or List MEMORY LIST Lists the documents currently stored in the machine s memory For details on the procedure to print see Printing Report or List N...

Страница 891: ...ion At the time of purchase the machine is set so that RX REPORT is not printed at all You can set the machine to print RX REPORT each time it receives a document or only when an error occurs by selecting RX report in Auto print settings under FAX settings Auto print settings If an error occurs when you receive a fax the error number is printed on RX REPORT there are some errors for which the caus...

Страница 892: ...order If you select No the machine prints RECIPIENT TELEPHONE NUMBER LIST with the registered entries in numerical order If you select Group dial the confirmation screen is displayed Select Yes The machine prints GROUP DIAL TELEPHONE NO LIST When you select an item other than Directory list Select Yes when the confirmation screen is displayed The machine prints the selected report or list Errors W...

Страница 893: ...ontents in memory then send a fax again Document Stored in Machine s Memory 059 Transmission has been canceled due to a fax information mismatch Transmission has been canceled because the machine could not detect the recipient s fax machine information or the information did not match the dialed number This message is displayed when Check RX FAX information in Security control under FAX settings i...

Страница 894: ... machine could not receive a fax because its memory is full Delete contents in memory then ask the sender to resend the fax See Document Stored in Machine s Memory 046 Reception has been rejected due to the specified fax rejection condition Reception has been rejected because the fax matches the fax rejection condition specified by FAX reception reject in Security control under FAX settings For de...

Страница 895: ... Driver Edit or Remove a Recipient from an Address Book Fax Driver Search for a Recipient in an Address Book Fax Driver Troubleshooting Problems Sending Faxes Fax Driver How to Open the Setting Screen of the Fax Driver General Notes Fax Driver 895 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 896: ...rinter or Name in the Print dialog box select Canon XXX series FAX where XXX is the model name 4 Click Print or OK Print dialog box in Notepad Note Click Preferences or Properties in the Print dialog box to open the print settings dialog box of the fax driver in which you can set the paper size and print orientation For details on how to open the print settings dialog box of the fax driver see How...

Страница 897: ...an Address Book Fax Driver If the recipient s fax telephone number is entered incorrectly or the registered fax telephone number is incorrect the fax may be sent to an unexpected recipient When sending an important fax it is recommended that you send it after confirming the entered information and recipient s status Note You can also specify Recipient by entering the Recipient Name and Fax Number ...

Страница 898: ...umber is XXX XXXX enter 0XXX XXXX 7 Click Send Now When a confirmation message is displayed click OK Important If you cannot send a fax due to line failure etc see Troubleshooting Problems Sending Faxes Fax Driver Canceling Transmission If you click Send Now in the Send FAX dialog box the printer icon is displayed in the taskbar Double click this icon to display the list of fax jobs awaiting trans...

Страница 899: ...k dialog box will be displayed Refer to Setup when Opening the Address Book for the First Time Windows XP for details In Windows 8 1 Windows 8 Windows 7 Windows Vista you can register an individual recipient Contact in the address book folder Windows Contacts as an address book file contact file which can be used in multiple applications However you cannot change the address book you use as only o...

Страница 900: ...ecipient You cannot specify a Distribution List 5 Enter the First Middle and Last of the contact in the Name and E mail tab Name tab when using Windows XP on the Properties dialog box The recipient s name will be printed at the top of the fax received by the recipient 900 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 901: ...cess number is 0 and the fax number is XXX XXXX enter 0XXX XXXX If you upgrade from Windows XP to Windows Vista the address book you created in Windows XP may not be reflected in Windows Vista In this case open the address book in the following procedure and reflect the information to a new address book 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel Appearance and Personalization Folder Options 2 Clic...

Страница 902: ...5 to open the folder 4 Double click the wab file The address book will be reflected in Windows Vista automatically Related Topic Edit or Remove a Recipient from an Address Book Fax Driver Search for a Recipient in an Address Book Fax Driver 902 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 903: ...o change the setting by clicking Address Book Profile in the print settings dialog box of the fax driver so as to use another Windows Address Book You can import the entries from one Windows Address Book file into another combining both sets of Windows Address Book entries To import fax recipient contacts in an Address Book file to an existing Address Book file follow the steps below 1 From the St...

Страница 904: ... 8 1 Click the Settings charm Control Panel Hardware and Sound Devices and Printers 2 Right click the Canon XXX series Printer icon or Canon XXX series FAX icon and select Printing Preferences then Canon XXX series FAX Where XXX is the model name Windows 7 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel Hardware and Sound Devices and Printers 2 Right click the Canon XXX series Printer icon or Canon XXX...

Страница 905: ...rom the Start menu select Control Panel Hardware and Sound Devices and Printers 2 Right click the Canon XXX series Printer icon or Canon XXX series FAX icon and select Printer Properties then Canon XXX series FAX Where XXX is the model name Windows Vista 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers 2 Right click the Canon XXX series FAX icon where XXX is the model name an...

Страница 906: ...address book Editing Recipients in an address book 1 Open the print settings dialog box of the fax driver 2 Click Address Book in the displayed dialog box 3 Select the recipient you want to edit from the Address Book dialog box then click Properties 4 Change information as needed on the Properties dialog box then click OK 906 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 907: ...1 Open the print settings dialog box of the fax driver 2 Click Address Book in the displayed dialog box 3 Select the recipient you want to delete from the Address Book dialog box then click Delete 907 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 908: ...4 When a confirmation message is displayed click Yes 908 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 909: ...nd is Print on the File menu 2 In Select Printer or Name in the Print dialog box select Canon XXX series FAX where XXX is the model name 3 Click Print or OK Print dialog box in Notepad 4 Click Display Address Book in Set Recipient in the Send FAX dialog box 5 Enter the name of the recipient you want to search for in Search by Recipient in the Select Recipient from Address Book dialog box 909 Downl...

Страница 910: ... will be displayed in the contact list with its name selected While the name is selected click Set as Recipient to enter it as the recipient Important You cannot search by criteria other than name 910 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 911: ...d the list of the faxes deleted from the machine s memory will be printed after turning the machine on Check 2 Is a document being sent from memory or a fax being received into memory When the message for the transmission reception is displayed on the machine s LCD Liquid Crystal Display monitor a fax is being sent from received into machine s memory Wait until the transmission reception is comple...

Страница 912: ...om Home of the Online Manual If you are in a hurry press the Stop button to close the message then send the fax Check 8 Is the telephone line connected correctly Reconnect the telephone line cable to the telephone line jack If the telephone line is connected correctly then there is a problem with your telephone line Contact your telephone company and the manufacturer of your terminal adapter or te...

Страница 913: ...nnot send a fax from the computer You can use the following characters for Fax Number Character Explanation 0 9 For use in telephone and fax numbers p To place a pause between numbers P To place a pause at the end of a sequence of numbers T Numbers after the T will be sent as a tone signal space To make the number easier to read You cannot insert a space at the front of a number You cannot use R M...

Страница 914: ...Error Occurs Problems Sending Faxes Problems Receiving Faxes Search Each Function Problems with Network Communication Problems with Printing Problems with Printing Quality Problems with Scanning Problems with Faxing Problems with the Machine Problems with Installation Downloading About Errors Messages Displayed If You Cannot Resolve the Problem 914 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 915: ...Problems with Network Communication Problems with the Machine While Using with Network Cannot Detect a Machine on a Network Other Problems with Network 915 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 916: ...Machine Stopped Working Suddenly Ink Remaining Level Is Not Displayed on Printer Status Monitor of the Machine Printing Speed Is Slow Cannot Use the Machine on Replacing an Access Point or Changing Its settings 916 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 917: ... the access point Refer to the instruction manual provided with the access point or contact its manufacturer to check the access point settings and then modify the machine settings How to Set an Encryption Key Check3 Make sure that the machine is not placed far away from the access point The access point is located indoors within the effective range for wireless communication Locate the machine wi...

Страница 918: ... using any programs that switch the network environment check their settings Some programs will enable a firewall by default Check11 When using a router connect the machine and computer to the LAN side same network segment If the problem is not resolved perform setup with the Setup CD ROM or perform it according to the instructions on our website For placement Make sure that there is no barrier or...

Страница 919: ...ess communication between different rooms or floors is generally poor Adjust the location of the devices Check7 Make sure that there is no source of radio wave interference in your vicinity If a device e g microwave oven using the same frequency bandwidth as the wireless station is placed nearby the device may cause interference Place the wireless station as far away from the interference source a...

Страница 920: ...tact its manufacturer Check2 If the MP Drivers are not installed install them Install the MP Drivers with the Setup CD ROM or install them from our website Check3 When using wireless LAN make sure that access control is not set to the access point For the procedures to connect an access point and set it up refer to the instruction manual of your access point or contact its manufacturer Note To che...

Страница 921: ...f the Machine Use the printer driver with bidirectional communication Select Enable bidirectional support in the Ports sheet of the properties dialog box of the printer driver How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window 921 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 922: ...loors is generally poor The metal concrete or timber including the metallic material mud wall or insulator may interrupt a wireless communication If the machine cannot communicate with the computer over a wireless LAN for the wall material place the machine and the computer in the same room or floor Check3 Make sure that there is no source of interference in your vicinity If a device e g microwave...

Страница 923: ... access point or contact its manufacturer to confirm the access point setting Make sure that the computer and the access point can communicate with each other under this setting Check2 If you are performing MAC address filtering or IP address filtering at the access point confirm that the MAC address or IP address for both the computer or the network device and the machine are registered Check3 If...

Страница 924: ...icate with the computer after the encryption type of the machine was switched make sure that encryption types for the computer and the access point matches that set to the machine Cannot Communicate with the Machine After Applying MAC IP Address Filtering or Entering an Encryption Key to the Access Point 924 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 925: ...hine When Setting up Network Communication The Machine Cannot Be Detected in the Wireless LAN The Machine Cannot Be Detected in the Wired LAN Note You cannot use the wireless LAN and the wired LAN at the same time 925 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 926: ...tings before redetecting the machine Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup Check 1 Cannot Detect the Machine during Wired LAN Setup Check 1 Note You can set up the network communication via USB To set up via USB select the Set up the network connection via USB check box on the Check Printer Settings screen and click Next 926 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 927: ...rk device it may take some time until ready for use After a while just turning on the machine or the network device click Redetect on the Check Printer Settings screen When the machine is detected follow the instructions on the screen to continue to set up the network communication If the machine and the network device are turned on If the machine could not be detected after clicking Redetect even...

Страница 928: ...ed The wireless LAN setting of the machine is disabled Enable the wireless LAN setting of the machine After enabling the wireless LAN setting click Back to Top on the Check Printer Settings screen to try to set up the network communication from the beginning If the icon is displayed Go to check 3 Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup Check 3 928 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Man...

Страница 929: ...k Redetect on the Check Printer Settings screen When the machine is detected follow the instructions on the screen to continue to set up the network communication If the machine cannot be detected the machine is not connected to the access point Connect the machine to the access point Click Back to Top on the Check Printer Settings screen to try to set up the network communication from the beginni...

Страница 930: ...ter In Windows 8 1 Windows 8 Windows 7 or Windows Vista confirm the SSID from the wireless network communication icon of the notification area on the desktop Note If the SSID of the access point is not displayed on your computer check the settings of your computer If the SSIDs are different Click Back to Top on the Check Printer Settings screen to try to set up the network communication from the b...

Страница 931: ...ess Then click Redetect on the Check Printer Settings screen When the machine is detected follow the instructions on the screen to continue to set up the network communication When the message does not appear on your computer Cancel to set up then set the security software to allow Canon software to access the network On the Setup CD ROM select win Driver DrvSetup then set the security software to...

Страница 932: ...ettings of the access point refer to the instruction manual supplied with the access point or contact its manufacturer After checking the settings of the access point click Redetect on the Check Printer Settings screen When the machine is detected follow the instructions on the screen to continue to set up the network communication If the problem is not resolved select the Set up the network conne...

Страница 933: ...e network device it may take some time until ready for use After a while just turning on the machine or the network device click Redetect on the Check Printer Settings screen When the machine is detected follow the instructions on the screen to continue to set up the network communication If the LAN cable is connected and the machine and the network device are turned on If the machine could not be...

Страница 934: ... set up the network communication After that configure the computer and network device For the procedures refer to the instruction manuals supplied with the computer and network device or contact their manufacturers If you can view any web page after configuring the computer and network device try to set up the network communication from the beginning If you can view any web page Go to check 3 Can...

Страница 935: ...d The wired LAN setting of the machine is disabled Enable the wired LAN setting of the machine After enabling the wired LAN setting click Back to Top on the Check Printer Settings screen to try to set up the network communication from the beginning If the icon is displayed Go to check 4 Cannot Detect the Machine during Wired LAN Setup Check 4 935 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 936: ...irm LAN settings LAN setting list Make sure that Connection on the touch screen is set to Active If Connection is set to Inactive The machine is not connected to the router Connect the machine to the router Click Back to Top on the Check Printer Settings screen to try to set up the network communication from the beginning If Connection is set to Active Go to check 5 Cannot Detect the Machine durin...

Страница 937: ...ess Then click Redetect on the Check Printer Settings screen When the machine is detected follow the instructions on the screen to continue to set up the network communication When the message does not appear on your computer Cancel to set up then set the security software to allow Canon software to access the network On the Setup CD ROM select win Driver DrvSetup then set the security software to...

Страница 938: ...anual supplied with the router or contact its manufacturer After checking the settings of the router click Redetect on the Check Printer Settings screen When the machine is detected follow the instructions on the screen to continue to set up the network communication If the problem is not resolved select the Set up the network connection via USB check box on the Check Printer Settings screen and c...

Страница 939: ... make sure that the machine is associated with the port When No Driver is displayed under Name in IJ Network Tool there is no association Select Associate Port on the Settings menu then associate the port with the machine When the Printer Driver Is Not Associated with a Port Check7 Make sure that the network settings in the machine are identical with those of the access point Refer to the instruct...

Страница 940: ...river Check13 Make sure that the firewall of the security software is disabled If the firewall function of your security software is turned on a message may appear warning that Canon software is attempting to access the network If the warning message appears set the security software to always allow access If using any programs that switch the network environment check their settings Some programs...

Страница 941: ...Disable LAN LAN settings Check3 Make sure that the LAN cable is connected properly Make sure that the machine is connected to the router with the LAN cable If the LAN cable is loose connect the cable properly If the LAN cable is connected to the WAN side of the router connect the cable to the LAN side of the router 941 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 942: ...ge Is Displayed on the Computer Screen During Setup The Administrator Password Set to the Machine Was Forgotten Checking Information about the Network Packets Are Sent Steadily How to Restore the Machine s Network Settings to Factory Default 942 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 943: ...cess point using IJ Network Tool When using WEP The key length key format the key to use one of 1 to 4 and the authentication method must match among the access point the machine and the computer In order to communicate with an access point that uses automatically generated WEP keys you must configure the machine to use the key generated by the access point by entering it in hexadecimal format Nor...

Страница 944: ...ion is selected automatically for the dynamic encryption method For details see Changing the WPA WPA2 Detailed Settings Note This machine supports WPA WPA2 PSK WPA WPA2 Personal and WPA2 PSK WPA2 Personal 944 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 945: ...ator password is already specified for the machine at the time of purchase For details About the Administrator Password For improving security it is recommended to change the administrator password Changing the Settings in the Admin Password Sheet The Screen for Setting the Encryption Is Displayed After Selecting the Access Point in the Search Screen This screen is displayed automatically if the s...

Страница 946: ...be used so continue the setup procedure to complete it Important If you connect to a network that is not protected with security measures there is a risk of disclosing data such as your personal information to a third party 946 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 947: ...ine settings Select Reset all then the administrator password reverts to the default Reset setting After initializing the machine settings perform setup with the Setup CD ROM or perform it according to the instructions on our website 947 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 948: ...tion on the View menu Canon IJ Network Tool Screen Checking the IP Address or the MAC Address of the Computer To check the IP address or MAC address assigned to the computer follow the procedure below 1 Select Command Prompt as shown below In Windows 8 1 or Windows 8 select Command Prompt from the Start screen If Command Prompt is not displayed on the Start screen select the Search charm then sear...

Страница 949: ...ccess point and then press the Enter key ping XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX is the IP address of the target device If the communication is available a message such as the following is displayed Reply from XXX XXX XXX XXX bytes 32 time 10ms TTL 255 When Request timed out is displayed the communication is not available Checking the Network Setting Information To check the network setting informati...

Страница 950: ...ne over the network When using the computer in a network environment other than the one used to set up the machine disable IJ Network Scanner Selector EX To disable IJ Network Scanner Selector EX right click the icon on the notification area on the desktop then select Disable Canon IJ Network Scanner Selector EX 950 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 951: ...printing scanning or faxing operation from a computer over network may become impossible To use the machine over network perform setup with the Setup CD ROM or perform it according to the instructions on our website Initialize the network setting using the operation panel of the machine Reset setting 951 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 952: ...nting Does Not Start Paper Jams Paper Does Not Feed Properly No Paper Error Occurs Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing Copying Printing Stops Before It Is Completed 952 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 953: ... problem with the relay device Consult the reseller of the relay device for details There could also be a problem with the USB cable Replace the USB cable and try printing again When you use the machine over LAN make sure that the machine is connected to the network with a LAN cable or is set up correctly Check3 Is the access point mode enabled When you print using a mode other than the access poi...

Страница 954: ...es Printer icon where XXX is your machine s name then select Properties 4 Click the Ports tab to confirm the port settings Make sure that a port named USBnnn where n is a number with Canon XXX series Printer appearing in the Printer column is selected for Print to the following port s Note When the machine is used over LAN the port name of the machine is displayed as CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx i...

Страница 955: ...nter using Associate Port in the Settings menu If the problem is not resolved reinstall the MP Drivers with the Setup CD ROM or install them from our website Check8 Is the size of the print data extremely large Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet on the printer driver Then set Prevention of Print Data Loss in the displayed dialog to On When On is selected for Prevention of Print Data Loss ...

Страница 956: ...on the computer screen When a Support Code and a message are displayed on the touch screen For details on how to remove the jammed paper refer to Support Code List When Paper Is Jammed Note You can confirm the actions against errors with Support Codes on your computer or on the touch screen by searching a Support Code Click Here to Search 956 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 957: ...ets of paper you load at a time to less than half of the paper load limit Always load the paper in portrait orientation regardless of the printing orientation Loading Paper Important When loading paper in the cassette slide the paper guide on the front side to align with the corresponding mark of page size Load the paper with the print side facing DOWN load the paper stack in the center of the cas...

Страница 958: ...ller Note Cleaning the paper feed roller will wear the roller so perform this procedure only when necessary Check7 If two or more sheets of paper feed from the cassette at once clean the inside of the cassette For information on cleaning the inside of the cassette refer to Cleaning the Pad in the Cassette If you cannot remove the paper or the paper tears inside the machine or if the paper jam erro...

Страница 959: ... depending on the version of the application software Check4 Make sure that the media type setting is correct Make sure that the media type setting matches the actual size of the paper with a size suitable for automatic duplex printing Make sure that the type of loaded paper is suitable for automatic duplex printing on the Main sheet in the printer driver setup window Note To switch to manual dupl...

Страница 960: ...nting a document with a large printing area or printing multiple copies of a document printing may pause to allow the ink to dry Check3 Has the machine been printing continuously for a long period If the machine has been printing continuously for a long time the print head or other parts around it may overheat The machine may stop printing at a line break for a period of time and then resume print...

Страница 961: ...Problems with Printing Quality Print Results Not Satisfactory Ink Is Not Ejected 961 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 962: ...print from your USB flash drive by operating the machine Confirm by using the operation panel on the machine Setting Items for Photo Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine To print from a computer Confirm by using the printer driver Printing with Easy Setup Check2 Make sure that the appropriate print quality is selected referring to the table in Check 1 Select a print quality option sui...

Страница 963: ...Back of the Paper Is Smudged Colors Are Uneven or Streaked 963 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 964: ... software to compress print data check box then click OK Deselect the check box after printing is complete Check2 Is the size of the print data extremely large Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet on the printer driver Then set Prevention of Print Data Loss in the displayed dialog to On When On is selected for Prevention of Print Data Loss print quality may be reduced Check3 Is the space of...

Страница 965: ... this select the setting to reduce printing from the printer driver Important Reduced printing may affect the layout depending on your document Apply the print setting specified with the application software if the software has a enlarge reduce printing function 1 Open the printer driver setup window How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window 2 Check the Duplex Printing check box in the Page Setu...

Страница 966: ...No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong 966 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 967: ...d try printing the Nozzle Check Pattern again If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning turn off the machine and perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours When you turn the machine off do not unplug it from the power supply If the probl...

Страница 968: ...nals Check7 Is the original document is loaded with the proper side facing up down When loading the original on the platen glass the side to be copied should be face down When loading the original in the ADF the side to be copied should be face up Check8 Did you copy a printout done by this machine If you use a printout done by this machine as the original print quality may be reduced depending on...

Страница 969: ...d Note If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Alignment perform Print Head Alignment manually referring to Aligning the Print Head Manually Check3 Increase the print quality and try printing again Increasing the print quality on the operation panel of the machine or in the printer driver may improve the print result Check4 If lines are misaligned with manual duplex printing...

Страница 970: ...ed thin lines may not be printed Try thickening the lines in the document Check2 Is the size of the print data extremely large Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet on the printer driver Then set Prevention of Print Data Loss in the displayed dialog to On When On is selected for Prevention of Print Data Loss print quality may be reduced 970 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 971: ...t on the printer driver Select the Do not allow application software to compress print data check box then click OK Deselect the check box after printing is complete Check2 Is the size of the print data extremely large Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet on the printer driver Then set Prevention of Print Data Loss in the displayed dialog to On When On is selected for Prevention of Print Da...

Страница 972: ...intensity the paper may absorb too much ink and become wavy causing paper abrasion When printing from your computer You can confirm the intensity using the printer driver Adjusting Intensity When copying Setting Items for Copying Check3 Is Photo Paper used for printing photographs When printing data with high color saturation such as photographs or images in deep color we recommend using Photo Pap...

Страница 973: ...ng Photo Paper Plus Semi gloss even if the sheet is curled load one sheet at a time as it is If you roll up this paper to flatten this may cause cracks on the surface of the paper and reduce the print quality We recommend putting unused paper back into the package and keeping it on a level surface For Plain Paper Turn the paper over and reload it to print on the other side For Other Paper If the c...

Страница 974: ...correctly to match the loaded paper set the machine to prevent paper abrasion by using the operation panel or the computer Print speed may be reduced if you apply the setting to prevent paper abrasion setting Readjust the setting not to prevent paper abrasion once printing is complete If not this setting remains enabled for all subsequent print jobs To set by using the operation panel Press the HO...

Страница 975: ...edge of the paper may become stained with ink Resize your original document in your application software Printing Area Check7 Is the platen glass or the glass of ADF dirty Clean the platen glass or the glass of ADF Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover Note If the glass of ADF is dirty black streaks appear on the paper as shown below Check8 Is the paper feed roller dirty Clean the paper fee...

Страница 976: ...y so that paper smudged and scratched are prevented 1 Make sure that the machine is turned on 2 Open the printer driver setup window How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window 3 Click the Maintenance tab and then Custom Settings 4 Drag the Ink Drying Wait Time slide bar to set the wait time and then click OK 5 Confirm the message and click OK 976 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 977: ...sults Not Satisfactory Check2 Perform the Bottom Plate Cleaning to clean the inside of the machine Cleaning the Inside of the Machine Bottom Plate Cleaning Note When performing duplex printing or too much printing the inside may become stained with ink 977 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 978: ...print head nozzles Refer to When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing Print Head Cleaning and Print Head Deep Cleaning If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly Check to see if a particular color s ink tank is not empty If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly though ink is sufficient perform the Print Head Cleaning and try pri...

Страница 979: ...If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice If Print Head Deep Cleaning does not resolve the problem the print head may be damaged Contact the service center Check3 Perform Print Head Alignment Aligning the Print Head Note If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Alignment perform Print Head Alignment manually referring to Aligning the P...

Страница 980: ...s not empty If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly though ink is sufficient perform the Print Head Cleaning and try printing the Nozzle Check Pattern again If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning turn off the machine and perform anoth...

Страница 981: ...Problems with Scanning Problems with Scanning Scan Results Not Satisfactory Software Problems 981 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 982: ...ScanGear Scanner Driver Screen Does Not Appear Cannot Scan Multiple Items at One Time Slow Scanning Speed There is not enough memory Message Is Displayed Computer Stops Operating during Scanning Scanner Does Not Work after Upgrading Windows Scanned Image Does Not Open 982 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 983: ...rned on Check 2 Connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer Check 3 If the USB cable is connected to a USB hub remove it from the USB hub and connect it to a USB port on the computer Check 4 Restart the computer 983 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 984: ...ed multiple times select the one that does not include WIA Note The operation may differ depending on the application Use the WIA driver when scanning from a WIA compliant application Scanning with WIA Driver Check 3 Make sure that the application supports TWAIN You cannot start ScanGear scanner driver from applications not supporting TWAIN Check 4 Scan and save images with IJ Scan Utility and ope...

Страница 985: ...move it from the USB hub and connect it to a USB port on the computer Check 5 Make sure that MP Drivers is installed If not installed install MP Drivers from the Setup CD ROM or the web page Check 6 Select your scanner or printer on the application s menu Note The operation may differ depending on the application Check 7 Make sure that the application supports TWAIN You cannot start ScanGear scann...

Страница 986: ...e items are placed correctly Placing Items When Scanning from a Computer Check 2 Check if you can properly scan one item Some applications do not support multiple image scanning In that case scan each item individually 986 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 987: ...on Grain Correction etc to None Refer to Image Settings for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details Check 3 In IJ Scan Utility deselect the Correct slanted text document Detect the orientation of text document and rotate image checkbox and scan again Settings Document Scan Dialog Box Settings Custom Scan Dialog Box 987 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 988: ...e is not enough memory Message Is Displayed Check 1 Exit other applications and try again Check 2 Reduce the resolution or output size and scan again Resolution 988 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 989: ...ace then scan again Error message may appear if there is not enough hard disk space to scan and save when the image size is too large such as when scanning a large item at high resolution Check 3 In Folder to Save Temporary Files of IJ Scan Utility specify a folder on a drive with sufficient free space Settings General Settings Dialog Box Check 4 Multiple devices may be connected to USB ports Disc...

Страница 990: ...s are required to perform a task If you are logged on to an administrator account follow the on screen instructions Windows 7 Windows Vista 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel Programs Programs and Features 2 Double click Canon IJ Scan Utility 3 When a confirmation appears click Yes 4 When uninstallation is complete click OK IJ Scan Utility is deleted Note In Windows 7 and Windows Vista a c...

Страница 991: ...Step 3 Reinstall MP Drivers and IJ Scan Utility Reinstall MP Drivers and IJ Scan Utility from the Setup CD ROM or the web page 991 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 992: ...ted by the application scan the image again and select a popular data format such as JPEG when saving it Refer to the application s manual for details If you have any questions contact the manufacturer of the application 992 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 993: ...Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas Cannot Scan at the Correct Size Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning from the Operation Panel Item Is Placed Correctly but the Scanned Image Is Slanted Scanned Image Is Enlarged Reduced on the Computer Monitor 993 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 994: ...uce moire checkbox in Image Processing Settings Settings Document Scan Dialog Box Settings Custom Scan Dialog Box Settings Scan and Stitch Dialog Box Settings OCR Dialog Box Settings E mail Dialog Box On the Basic Mode tab of ScanGear scanner driver select Magazine Color in Select Source Refer to Basic Mode Tab for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details On the Advanced Mode tab of S...

Страница 995: ...On the Basic Mode tab of ScanGear scanner driver select Magazine Color in Select Source Refer to Basic Mode Tab for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details On the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear set Descreen in Image Settings to ON Refer to Image Settings for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details Note If moire appears when you scan a digital print photo take the above m...

Страница 996: ...o Image Settings for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details On the Color Settings tab in the Preferences dialog box of ScanGear set Color Matching Refer to Color Settings Tab for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details 996 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 997: ...also manually specify the scan area in thumbnail view or when there are white margins along the item for example in photos or when you want to create custom cropping frames Adjusting Cropping Frames in the Image Stitch Window Note Refer to Adjusting Cropping Frames ScanGear for your model from Home of the Online Manual for how to adjust cropping frames with ScanGear scanner driver 997 Downloaded f...

Страница 998: ...Cannot Scan at the Correct Size Check Make sure that the items are placed correctly Placing Items When Scanning from a Computer 998 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 999: ...t scan properly by automatically detecting the item type specify the item type and size When Scanning from the Operation Panel Refer to Setting Items for Scanning Using the Operation Panel of the Machine for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details on the setting items when scanning from the operation panel When Scanning with IJ Scan Utility Scanning Documents Scanning Photos Scanning...

Страница 1000: ...ted Check When Document or Magazine is selected for Select Source deselect the Correct slanted text document checkbox and scan the item again Settings Document Scan Dialog Box Settings Custom Scan Dialog Box 1000 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1001: ... any questions contact the manufacturer of the application Note You cannot reduce the image size in Paint To reduce the display size open the images in an application Check 2 Change the resolution setting in ScanGear scanner driver and scan again The higher the resolution the larger the resulting image will be Resolution 1001 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1002: ...Software Problems The E mail Client You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E mail Client 1002 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1003: ...e mail client s MAPI is enabled Refer to the e mail client s manual for how to set MAPI If the problem is not solved even when MAPI is enabled select None Attach Manually in the screen for selecting an e mail client then manually attach the image to the outgoing e mail 1003 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1004: ...Problems with Faxing Problems Sending Faxes Problems Receiving Faxes Cannot Send a Fax Clearly Telephone Problems 1004 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1005: ...ailure occurs or you unplug the power cord all faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted For details on how to unplug the power cord refer to Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord Note If the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted by a power failure or unplugging the power cord the list of the faxes deleted from the machine s memory MEMORY CLEAR REPORT will be printed after turning...

Страница 1006: ...heck8 Does an error occur during transmission Ensure that a message is displayed on the Fax standby screen When a message is displayed on the Fax standby screen check the cause A Message for Faxing Is Displayed on the Fax Standby Screen Print ACTIVITY REPORT and check for an error Summary of Reports and Lists Check9 Is the document loaded properly Remove the document then reload it on the platen g...

Страница 1007: ... the redial history or by entering the fax telephone numbers as the recipient of sequential broadcasting If you already have dialed by selecting from the redial history or by entering the fax telephone numbers select the recipient from the machine s directory Errors Often Occur When You Send a Fax Check Check the telephone line condition or the connection If the telephone line or connection is poo...

Страница 1008: ...ower cord then unplug the power cord If a power failure occurs or you unplug the power cord all faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted For details on how to unplug the power cord refer to Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord Note If the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted by a power failure or unplugging the power cord the list of the faxes deleted from the machine s memory ...

Страница 1009: ...ng faxes in the fax mode printing will start automatically after the ink tank is replaced Replacing an Ink Tank When the machine receives black white faxes in the machine s memory if 2 sided is selected for 2 sidedPrintSetting in FAX paper settings selecting 1 sided may print the faxes You can set the machine to forcibly print a received fax even if the ink has run out Set Print when out of ink in...

Страница 1010: ...e answers Setting the Receive Mode 1 This setting is available only in the US and Canada 2 This setting may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase Quality of Received Fax is Poor Check1 Check the scan settings of the sender s fax machine Ask the sender to adjust the scan settings of the fax machine Check2 Is ECM RX set to OFF Select ON for ECM RX in Adv communication setti...

Страница 1011: ...is select for ECM RX in Adv communication settings in Advanced FAX settings under FAX settings the machine cannot receive color faxes The machine will disconnect the telephone line or receive color faxes in black white according to the setting of the sender s fax machine Set ECM RX to ON Advanced FAX settings Errors Often Occur When You Receive a Fax Check1 Check the telephone line condition or th...

Страница 1012: ...ng suitable for the document On the touch screen select an image quality setting and a scan contrast setting that are suitable for the document Setting Items for Sending Faxes Check4 Is the original document loaded with the wrong side facing upwards or downwards When loading a document on the platen glass the side to be scanned should be face down When loading a document in the ADF the side to be ...

Страница 1013: ...type setting and change it as necessary Setting the Telephone Line Type Telephone Disconnects During a Call Check Is the telephone line cable or the telephone or a peripheral device such as an external telephone an answering machine or a computer modem connected correctly Check that the telephone line cable and the telephone or a peripheral device such as an external telephone an answering machine...

Страница 1014: ...annot Communicate with the Machine with USB Connection The Display on the Touch Screen Cannot Be Seen At All An Unintended Language Is Displayed on the Touch Screen Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing Printer Status Monitor Is Not Displayed 1014 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1015: ...into the power cord connector of the machine then turn it back on Check3 Unplug the machine from the power supply then plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on after leaving it for at least 2 minutes If the problem is not resolved contact the service center 1015 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1016: ...ction Does the USB port on your computer support Hi Speed USB connection Does the USB cable or the USB hub support Hi Speed USB connection Be sure to use a certified Hi Speed USB cable We recommend that the cable is no longer than around 10 feet 3 meters Does the operating system of your computer support Hi Speed USB connection Obtain and install the latest update for your computer Does the Hi Spe...

Страница 1017: ...e Computer Using a USB Cable to connect the USB cable properly Check3 Do not start up IJ Network Tool while printing Check4 Do not print while IJ Network Tool is running Check5 Make sure that Enable bidirectional support is selected in the Ports sheet of the properties dialog box of the printer driver How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window 1017 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1018: ...t All If the POWER lamp is off The machine is not powered on Connect the power cord and press the ON button If the POWER lamp is lit The touch screen may be in the screen saver mode Tap the touch screen 1018 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1019: ...cording to the following procedure 1 Press the HOME button and wait for about 5 seconds 2 Flick the HOME screen then tap Setup Using the Operation Panel 3 Tap Device settings 4 Tap the fifth setting item from the top 5 Tap the language for the touch screen 1019 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1020: ...izing Wait until the POWER lamp stops flashing and remains lit and then open the front cover again Check2 Is an error message displayed on the touch screen Close the front cover follow the Support Code error number displayed in the error message to resolve the error and then reopen it For details on how to resolve the error refer to Support Code List Check3 Has the front cover been left open for 6...

Страница 1021: ...or is selected on the Option menu of the printer status monitor 1 Open the printer driver setup window How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window 2 On the Maintenance sheet click View Printer Status 3 Select Enable Status Monitor on the Option menu if it is not selected 1021 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1022: ...ding Cannot Install the MP Drivers Easy WebPrint EX Does Not Start Up or Easy WebPrint EX Menu Does Not Appear How to Update MP Drivers in Network Environment Uninstalling IJ Network Tool 1022 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1023: ...ter In Windows XP click Start then My Computer 2 Double click the CD ROM icon on the displayed window If the contents of the CD ROM are displayed double click MSETUP4 EXE If you cannot install the MP Drivers with the Setup CD ROM install them from our website Note If the CD ROM icon is not displayed try the following Remove the CD ROM from your computer then insert it again Restart your computer I...

Страница 1024: ... 2 Unplug the USB cable from the machine and the computer then connect it again 3 Turn the machine on Check3 If you cannot resolve the problem follow the procedure below to reinstall the MP Drivers 1 Click Cancel 2 Click Start Over on the Installation Failure screen 3 Click Exit on the MAXIFY XXX screen where XXX is your machine s name then remove the CD ROM 4 Turn the machine off 5 Restart the co...

Страница 1025: ...nnecessary MP Drivers If you reinstall the MP Drivers install the MP Drivers with the Setup CD ROM or install them from our website Note If the installer was forced to be terminated due to a Windows error the system may be in an unstable condition and you may not be able to install the drivers Restart your computer before reinstalling 1025 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1026: ...r from our website Note If Easy WebPrint EX is not installed on your computer a message asking you to install it may be displayed on the notification area on the desktop Click the message then follow the instructions on the computer screen to install Easy WebPrint EX While the installation or download Easy WebPrint EX is in progress it is necessary to access the Internet Check2 Is Canon Easy WebPr...

Страница 1027: ...egular procedure When the connection method selection screen is displayed select Use the printer with wireless LAN connection or Use the printer with wired LAN connection according to the connection method you use The machine will be detected automatically in the network After making sure that the machine is detected install the MP Drivers following the on screen instructions Note You can use the ...

Страница 1028: ...ures 2 Select Canon IJ Network Tool from the program list then click Uninstall If the User Account Control screen appears click Continue In Windows 7 or Windows Vista 1 Click Start Control Panel Programs Programs and Features 2 Select Canon IJ Network Tool from the program list then click Uninstall If the User Account Control screen appears click Continue In Windows XP 1 Click Start Control Panel ...

Страница 1029: ...About Errors Messages Displayed If an Error Occurs A Message for Faxing Is Displayed on the Fax Standby Screen A Message Is Displayed 1029 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1030: ...een When a Support Code and a message are displayed on the computer screen When a Support Code and a message are displayed on the touch screen For details on how to resolve errors with Support Codes refer to Support Code List Note You can confirm the actions against errors with Support Codes on your computer or on the touch screen by searching a Support Code Click Here to Search For details on how...

Страница 1031: ...e for Color transmission in Advanced FAX settings under FAX settings The machine converts color documents into black white data if the recipient s fax machine does not support color faxing Advanced FAX settings Failed to connect The telephone line cable with a modular plug may not be plugged in properly Make sure that the cable is plugged in properly and resend the fax after a while If you still c...

Страница 1032: ...t the fax stored in the machine s memory e g if you did not resolve the problem by pressing the Stop button you can delete or print the fax stored in the machine s memory later Document Stored in Machine s Memory Busy no signal The recipient s number you dialed is busy Try dialing again after waiting for a moment Resending Faxes Redialing a Busy Number The fax telephone number dialed is incorrect ...

Страница 1033: ...nting Deleting a Document in Machine s Memory FAX info does not match Transmission has been canceled because the machine could not detect the recipient s fax machine information or the information did not match the dialed number This message is displayed when Check RX FAX information in Security control under FAX settings is set to ON For details see Sending Faxes after Checking Information Checki...

Страница 1034: ...document saved on the USB flash drive that can be read by this machine The machine may not recognize the file if the file name or folder path contain certain characters Use only alphanumeric characters Photo data edited or processed on a computer must be printed from the computer Note When a photo which has been processed on a computer is selected is displayed on the touch screen Cannot print the ...

Страница 1035: ...te See Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord for unplugging the power cord The power cord has been unplugged and unsent received docs in memory have been lost A power failure has occurred or the power cord has been unplugged when the faxes are stored in the machine s memory Important If a power failure occurs or you unplug the power cord all faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted For deta...

Страница 1036: ... configured appropriately in the printer driver In the following instructions XXX signifies your machine s name 1 Log on as a user account with administrator privilege 2 Select items as shown below In Windows 8 1 or Windows 8 select Control Panel from the Settings charm on Desktop Hardware and Sound Devices and Printers In Windows 7 select Devices and Printers from the Start menu In Windows Vista ...

Страница 1037: ...e port named CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx is selected when the machine is used over LAN Launch IJ Network Tool and select CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx as you confirmed in step 4 then associate the port with the printer using Associate Port in the Settings menu If the problem is not resolved reinstall the MP Drivers with the Setup CD ROM or install them from our website Check3 Make sure that the machine is connected to ...

Страница 1038: ...utside the printer status monitor check the following Could not spool successfully due to insufficient disk space Delete any unnecessary files to increase the amount of free space on the disk Could not spool successfully due to insufficient memory Quit other running application softwares to increase available memory If you cannot print yet restart your computer and retry printing Printer driver co...

Страница 1039: ...me of the next survey To send the information automatically see Changing the confirmation screen setting If you do not agree to participate in the survey program Click Do not agree The confirmation screen will be closed and the survey at that time is skipped The confirmation screen will be displayed again one month later To uninstall the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program To uninst...

Страница 1040: ...een instructions 2 Select Canon Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program 3 Select Change If you select Yes after you have followed the on screen instructions the confirmation screen will be displayed at the time of the next survey If you select No the information will be sent automatically Note If you select Uninstall or Remove in Windows XP the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey...

Страница 1041: ...ord from the outlet and contact the seller or the service center Never attempt to repair or disassemble the machine yourself Attempts by customers to repair or take apart the machine will invalidate any warranty regardless of whether the warranty has expired Before contacting the service center confirm the following Product name Your machine s name is located on the front cover of the setup manual...

Страница 1042: ... Screen 1000 to 1ZZZ 1007 1008 1200 1300 1303 1310 1313 1314 1575 1600 1660 1688 1700 1701 1754 1755 1872 1873 1874 1890 2000 to 2ZZZ 2001 2002 2111 2112 2113 2121 2122 2500 2700 2801 2802 2803 2805 4000 to 4ZZZ 4100 4103 4104 5000 to 5ZZZ 5011 5012 5040 5050 5051 5100 5102 5103 5104 5105 5200 5203 5204 5205 5206 5207 5208 5209 5400 5500 5501 5B00 5B01 5C01 6000 to 6ZZZ 6000 6500 6502 6700 6800 68...

Страница 1043: ...7203 7204 7205 7300 9000 to 2ZZZ 9000 9500 A000 to ZZZZ B202 B203 B204 B502 B503 B504 C000 About the support code for paper jam you can also refer to Support Code List When Paper Is Jammed 1043 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1044: ... cover 1300 If the paper is jammed inside the rear cover 1303 If the paper is jammed inside the rear cover as the machine pulled in the printed paper 1313 If the paper is jammed inside the rear cover when automatic duplex printing 1314 If the document is jammed in the ADF 2801 Cases other than above In Other Cases 1044 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1045: ...emove jammed paper during printing press the Stop button to cancel print jobs before turning off the machine 1 Open the front cover Important Do not touch the clear film A or the white belt B If the paper or your hands touch these parts and blot or scratch them the machine can be damaged 2 Make sure that the jammed paper is not under the print head holder If the jammed paper is under the print hea...

Страница 1046: ...3 Hold the jammed paper with your hands If the paper is rolled up pull it out 4 Pull the paper slowly not to tear it then pull the paper out 1046 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1047: ...age where the paper was jammed is not printed reprint if necessary When the paper is jammed while duplex printing or duplex copying is in progress it is possible that the printing or copying order is not as you expect if you resume printing after clearing the paper jam error In this case cancel printing and reprint from the beginning When the paper is jammed while layout printing 2 on 1 copying or...

Страница 1048: ...er other than A5 sized one to print documents with photos or graphics otherwise the printout may curl and cause paper exit jams If you cannot remove the paper or the paper tears inside the machine or if the paper jam error continues after removing the paper contact the service center 1048 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1049: ...or receiving all the faxes before unplugging the power cord If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted Note If you need to turn off the machine to remove jammed paper during printing press the Stop button to cancel print jobs before turning off the machine 1 Rotate the machine so that the rear side of the machine faces toward you 2 If the protective mater...

Страница 1050: ...he paper output tray It becomes easy to pull out the paper 5 Close the rear cover slowly Close the rear cover then slide it to the right Slide the rear cover so that the mark on the rear cover aligns with the mark on the machine 6 Reload the paper and tap OK on the touch screen of the machine If the paper is jammed while printing the faxes or the fax report in progress 1050 Downloaded from Manuals...

Страница 1051: ... paper is jammed while layout printing 2 on 1 copying or 4 on 1 copying is in progress it is possible that some pages are not printed if you resume printing after clearing the paper jam error In this case cancel printing and reprint from the beginning If you turned off the machine while taking the appropriate action of the paper jam error All print jobs in the queue are canceled Reprint if necessa...

Страница 1052: ...ned off while the machine is sending or receiving a fax or when the received fax or the unsent fax are stored in the machine s memory Make sure that the machine has completed sending or receiving all the faxes before unplugging the power cord If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted Note If you need to turn off the machine to remove jammed paper during ...

Страница 1053: ...off and turn it back on The paper may be ejected automatically Pull out the paper output tray It becomes easy to pull out the paper 5 Close the rear cover slowly Close the rear cover then slide it to the right Slide the rear cover so that the mark on the rear cover aligns with the mark on the machine 6 Reload the paper and tap OK on the touch screen of the machine 1053 Downloaded from ManualsPrint...

Страница 1054: ...me printing after clearing the paper jam error In this case cancel printing and reprint from the beginning When the paper is jammed while layout printing 2 on 1 copying or 4 on 1 copying is in progress it is possible that some pages are not printed if you resume printing after clearing the paper jam error In this case cancel printing and reprint from the beginning If you turned off the machine whi...

Страница 1055: ...re that the machine has completed sending or receiving all the faxes before unplugging the power cord If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted Note If you need to turn off the machine to remove jammed paper during printing press the Stop button to cancel print jobs before turning off the machine 1 Rotate the machine so that the rear side of the machine ...

Страница 1056: ...he paper output tray It becomes easy to pull out the paper 5 Close the rear cover slowly Close the rear cover then slide it to the right Slide the rear cover so that the mark on the rear cover aligns with the mark on the machine 6 Reload the paper and tap OK on the touch screen of the machine If the paper is jammed while printing the faxes or the fax report in progress 1056 Downloaded from Manuals...

Страница 1057: ...m error In this case cancel printing and reprint from the beginning When the paper is jammed while layout printing 2 on 1 copying or 4 on 1 copying is in progress it is possible that some pages are not printed if you resume printing after clearing the paper jam error In this case cancel printing and reprint from the beginning If you turned off the machine while taking the appropriate action of the...

Страница 1058: ...s in the ADF by pressing the Stop button while the machine is scanning the document If you press the Stop button during scanning then the document remained in the ADF the message about the paper remained in the ADF appears on the touch screen Tap OK so that the remaining document is automatically fed out If the original is jammed in the ADF Remove the document following the procedure below 1 If pr...

Страница 1059: ...gh or too low In this case reduce the number of document pages to approximately half of the loading capacity If the document still jams use the platen glass instead If the original is jammed in the ADF from the paper feed side If the document is jammed in the document output slot close the document tray as shown in the figure below and pull out the document When rescanning the document after clear...

Страница 1060: ...ollowing Check1 Are there any foreign objects around the paper output slot Check2 Are the rear cover attached properly Check3 Is the paper curled Load the paper after correcting its curl 1060 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1061: ...des with the both edges of the paper when you load paper in the cassette 1 After carrying out the above measures tap OK on the touch screen to dismiss the error Note The loadable paper differs depending on the paper source A4 Letter or Legal sized plain paper can be loaded in both the cassette 1 and the cassette 2 If you want to cancel printing press the machine s Stop button 1061 Downloaded from ...

Страница 1062: ...guides with the both edges of the paper when you load paper in the cassette 2 After carrying out the above measures tap OK on the touch screen to dismiss the error Important The loadable paper differs depending on the paper source The loadable paper in the cassette 2 is A4 Letter or Legal sized plain paper Note If you want to cancel printing press the machine s Stop button 1062 Downloaded from Man...

Страница 1063: ...1200 Cause The front cover is open Action Close the front cover and wait for a while Do not close it while you are replacing an ink tank 1063 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1064: ...uto duplex printing are A4 and Letter Make sure that the size of the paper loaded in the machine is correct Tapping OK on the touch screen will eject the paper and restart printing from the front side of the next paper The reverse side of the ejected sheet will not be printed 1064 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1065: ...ecomes empty replace it An ink tank cannot be replaced until it becomes empty Please be advised that Canon shall not be liable for any malfunction or trouble caused by continuation of printing under the ink out condition 1065 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1066: ...be printed and will be stored in the machine s memory until the ink is replaced You must manually print out faxes that were stored in the memory You can change the setting so that the received fax is forcibly printed out instead of being stored in the memory but all or part of the fax information may not be printed because of the ink out condition Important Do not remove an ink tank until a new on...

Страница 1067: ...1660 Cause The ink tank is not installed Action Install the ink tank 1067 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1068: ...Important Do not remove an ink tank until a new one is prepared to be installed Once you remove an ink tank the machine will not operate until a new one is installed Once you remove an ink tank the machine will not operate even if the removed ink tank is just reinstalled Note Since the information contained in the fax may be lost if it is printed in this condition the received fax will not be prin...

Страница 1069: ...1700 Cause The ink absorber is almost full Action Tap OK on the touch screen to continue printing Contact the service center 1069 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1070: ...1701 Cause The ink absorber is almost full Action Tap OK on the touch screen to continue printing Contact the service center 1070 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1071: ... Then push the ink tank After installing the ink tank properly close the front cover If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important The ink tank that was once installed cannot be removed until the ink runs out 1071 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1072: ...ank the machine will not operate even if the removed ink tank is just reinstalled Note Since the information contained in the fax may be lost if it is printed in this condition the received fax will not be printed and will be stored in the machine s memory until the ink is replaced You must manually print out faxes that were stored in the memory You can change the setting so that the received fax ...

Страница 1073: ...te paper information registration screen is displayed after inserting the cassette 1 Register the cassette paper information according to the paper you loaded in the cassette 1 If you want to cancel printing press the machine s Stop button 1073 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1074: ...te paper information registration screen is displayed after inserting the cassette 2 Register the cassette paper information according to the paper you loaded in the cassette 2 If you want to cancel printing press the machine s Stop button 1074 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1075: ...sette paper information registration screen is displayed after inserting the cassettes Register the cassette paper information according to the paper you loaded in the cassette 1 and the cassette 2 If you want to cancel printing press the machine s Stop button 1075 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1076: ... front cover then confirm that the protective material or the tape does not remain attached to the print head holder If you find the protective material or the tape remains attached remove it then close the front cover If the problem is not resolved contact the service center 1076 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1077: ...evice incompatible with the machine is connected Action Check the device connected to the USB flash drive port Printing photos directly is possible with a USB flash drive 1077 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1078: ...SB hub is connected Action If a USB flash drive is connected to the machine through the USB hub disconnect the hub from the machine Connect a USB flash drive directly to the machine 1078 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1079: ...so that they match the cassette paper information For details on the cassette paper information registering to the machine Paper setting for Printing Windows Paper setting for Printing Mac Paper setting for Printing Smartphone and so on If the paper settings for printing or copying are different from the cassette paper information registered to the machine as the following a message is displayed o...

Страница 1080: ...isplayed after replacing the paper and inserting the cassette 1 Register the cassette paper information according to the paper you loaded in the cassette 1 Note If you do not know what paper information to register to the machine press the Back button when the screen to select the operation is displayed When the previous screen is displayed confirm the paper size and the media type then register t...

Страница 1081: ...d the cassette paper information registered to the machine are different To change the setting using the operation panel Cassette settings Windows Cassette settings Mac Cassette settings Smartphone and so on To change the setting using the printer driver Changing the Printer Operation Mode Windows Changing the Printer Operation Mode Mac 1081 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1082: ...o that they match the cassette paper information For details on the cassette paper information registering to the machine Paper setting for Printing Windows Paper setting for Printing Mac Paper setting for Printing Smartphone and so on If the paper settings for printing or copying are different from the cassette paper information registered to the machine as the following a message is displayed on...

Страница 1083: ...s displayed after replacing the paper and inserting the cassette 2 Register the cassette paper information according to the paper you loaded in the cassette 2 Note If you do not know what paper information to register to the machine press the Back button when the screen to select the operation is displayed When the previous screen is displayed confirm the paper size and the media type then registe...

Страница 1084: ...d the cassette paper information registered to the machine are different To change the setting using the operation panel Cassette settings Windows Cassette settings Mac Cassette settings Smartphone and so on To change the setting using the printer driver Changing the Printer Operation Mode Windows Changing the Printer Operation Mode Mac 1084 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1085: ...o that they match the cassette paper information For details on the cassette paper information registering to the machine Paper setting for Printing Windows Paper setting for Printing Mac Paper setting for Printing Smartphone and so on If the paper settings for printing or copying are different from the cassette paper information registered to the machine as the following a message is displayed on...

Страница 1086: ...rmation registration screen is displayed after replacing the paper and inserting the cassettes Register the cassette paper information according to the paper you loaded in the cassette 1 and the cassette 2 Note If you do not know what paper information to register to the machine press the Back button when the screen to select the operation is displayed When the previous screen is displayed confirm...

Страница 1087: ...d the cassette paper information registered to the machine are different To change the setting using the operation panel Cassette settings Windows Cassette settings Mac Cassette settings Smartphone and so on To change the setting using the printer driver Changing the Printer Operation Mode Windows Changing the Printer Operation Mode Mac 1087 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1088: ...ot complete Action If the following screen is displayed the paper settings of the cassette 1 is not complete Tap Register on the touch screen of the machine to terminate the paper settings of the cassette 1 1088 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1089: ...ot complete Action If the following screen is displayed the paper settings of the cassette 2 is not complete Tap Register on the touch screen of the machine to terminate the paper settings of the cassette 2 1089 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1090: ...status of the print head Load one sheet of A4 Letter sized plain paper in the cassette 1 and perform Automatic Print Head Alignment again For Automatic Print Head Alignment always load paper in the cassette 1 Adjust your operating environment and or the position of the machine so that the paper output slot is not exposed directly to strong light After carrying out the above measures if the problem...

Страница 1091: ...he document is remained in the ADF Action Take the corresponding actions below When you copy tap OK on the touch screen to dismiss the error and try to copy again When the document is remained in the ADF tap OK on the touch screen to feed out the document When you scan press the Stop button to cancel the scanning and try to scan again 1091 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1092: ...2802 Cause No document in the ADF Action Tap OK on the touch screen to resolve the error then operate again after loading documents 1092 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1093: ...ment following the procedure below If the original is jammed in the ADF Remove the document following the procedure below 1 If printing is in progress press the Stop button 2 Turn off the machine 3 If a multi page document is loaded remove any pages other than the jammed page from the ADF then open the document feeder cover 4 Pull out the jammed document from the ADF 5 Close the document feeder co...

Страница 1094: ...duce the number of document pages to approximately half of the loading capacity If the document still jams use the platen glass instead If the original is jammed in the ADF from the paper feed side If the document is jammed in the document output slot close the document tray as shown in the figure below and pull out the document When rescanning the document after clearing the error rescan it from ...

Страница 1095: ...2805 Cause The document cover is open Action Close the document cover then tap OK on the touch screen of the machine 1095 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1096: ...tion When you print the contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM confirm the message on the computer screen make sure that genuine Canon ink tanks are installed properly for all colors then start printing again 1096 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1097: ...e Cannot perform printing with the current print settings Action Press the machine s Stop button to cancel printing Then change the print settings and print again 1097 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1098: ...pecify the paper size setting to A4 Letter or Legal and specify the media type setting to Plain Paper Then print again Note If you will not change the paper size setting or the media type setting select the cassette 1 as the paper source If this is the case register the cassette 1 paper information properly 1098 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1099: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1099 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1100: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1100 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1101: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1101 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1102: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1102 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1103: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1103 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1104: ... clicks into place After confirming the conditions above turn on the machine again If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important When you clear the jammed paper or protective material that is preventing the print head holder from moving be careful not to touch the clear film A or the white belt B If the paper or your hands touch these parts and blot or scratch them the machin...

Страница 1105: ... clicks into place After confirming the conditions above turn on the machine again If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important When you clear the jammed paper or protective material that is preventing the print head holder from moving be careful not to touch the clear film A or the white belt B If the paper or your hands touch these parts and blot or scratch them the machin...

Страница 1106: ... clicks into place After confirming the conditions above turn on the machine again If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important When you clear the jammed paper or protective material that is preventing the print head holder from moving be careful not to touch the clear film A or the white belt B If the paper or your hands touch these parts and blot or scratch them the machin...

Страница 1107: ... clicks into place After confirming the conditions above turn on the machine again If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important When you clear the jammed paper or protective material that is preventing the print head holder from moving be careful not to touch the clear film A or the white belt B If the paper or your hands touch these parts and blot or scratch them the machin...

Страница 1108: ... clicks into place After confirming the conditions above turn on the machine again If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important When you clear the jammed paper or protective material that is preventing the print head holder from moving be careful not to touch the clear film A or the white belt B If the paper or your hands touch these parts and blot or scratch them the machin...

Страница 1109: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1109 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1110: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1110 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1111: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1111 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1112: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1112 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1113: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1113 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1114: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1114 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1115: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1115 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1116: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1116 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1117: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1117 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1118: ...5500 Cause Ink tank has not been properly recognized Action Contact the service center 1118 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1119: ...5501 Cause Ink tank has not been properly recognized Action Contact the service center 1119 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1120: ...5B00 Cause Printer error has occurred Action Contact the service center 1120 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1121: ...5B01 Cause Printer error has occurred Action Contact the service center 1121 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1122: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1122 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1123: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1123 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1124: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1124 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1125: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1125 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1126: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1126 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1127: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1127 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1128: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1128 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1129: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1129 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1130: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1130 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1131: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1131 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1132: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1132 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1133: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1133 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1134: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1134 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1135: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1135 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1136: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1136 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1137: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1137 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1138: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1138 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1139: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1139 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1140: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1140 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1141: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1141 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1142: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1142 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1143: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1143 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1144: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1144 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1145: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1145 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1146: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1146 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1147: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1147 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1148: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1148 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1149: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1149 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1150: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1150 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1151: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1151 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1152: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1152 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1153: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1153 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1154: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1154 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1155: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1155 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1156: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1156 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1157: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1157 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1158: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1158 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1159: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1159 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1160: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1160 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1161: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1161 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1162: ...occurred Action Turn off the machine and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply Contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1162 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1163: ...occurred Action Turn off the machine and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply Contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1163 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1164: ...occurred Action Turn off the machine and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply Contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1164 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1165: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1165 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1166: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1166 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1167: ... of the machine from the power supply Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important If you unplug the power cord all the faxes stored in the machine s memory are deleted 1167 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Страница 1168: ... clicks into place After confirming the conditions above turn on the machine again If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Important When you clear the jammed paper or protective material that is preventing the print head holder from moving be careful not to touch the clear film A or the white belt B If the paper or your hands touch these parts and blot or scratch them the machin...

Отзывы:

Нет отзывов

Похожие инструкции для MB5300 series

Бренд: Olympus Страницы: 71

Бренд: DataCard Страницы: 8

Бренд: DataCard Страницы: 8

Бренд: DataCard Страницы: 3

Бренд: Oki Страницы: 20

Бренд: Microplex Страницы: 135

Бренд: Wang Страницы: 181

VarioPrint 6180

Бренд: Oce Страницы: 306

Posligne ODP-1000

Бренд: AURES Страницы: 4

WorkCentre XD130DF

Бренд: Xerox Страницы: 1

Бренд: A&D Страницы: 102

Бренд: GALLERY Страницы: 10

Бренд: Canon Страницы: 48

Pixma PRO-100S series

Бренд: Canon Страницы: 4

Pixma PRO-100S series

Бренд: Canon Страницы: 2

Бренд: Canon Страницы: 570

Бренд: Canon Страницы: 571

Бренд: Canon Страницы: 4

Бренды по названию

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Популярные бренды

Загрузить еще бренды